User’s Manual

DAC M-SERIES and DAC H-SERIES

ohv diagnostic GmbH

April 7, 2025
 Imprint

Responsible for the content:

ohv diagnostic GmbH Tel.: +49 (0) 351 79527300
Großenhainer Str. 101 Fax: +49 (0) 351 79527301
01127 Dresden E-Mail: [email protected]
Germany Web: www.ohv-diagnostic.com

Legal Information:
Copyrights and other rights in the entire content are reserved for ohv diagnostic GmbH, hereinafter
called Ohv. The entire content of that manual is copyright protected. Any reproduction, trans-
mission, modification, linking or use for any other purposes, either commercially or publicly are
prohibited without written approval of Ohv. Ohv verifies and reviews the information. In spite
of all diligence, data and technology may have changed in the meantime. Liability and guarantee
for up-to-dateness, correctness and completeness can therefore not be given. Furthermore, Ohv
reserves the right to change or up-date any information at any time and without any further notice.
Ohv and its related companies reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained
therein. Without written consent of Ohv, no part of this manual is allowed to be photocopied or
reproduced, in any form. Changes and modifications of this manual are reserved by Ohv without
any previous notice. Ohv is not liable for any technical or printing errors in this manual. Likewise,
Ohv does not assume any liability for damages, which have been caused directly or indirectly while
delivering or using this material.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Revision List

Revision Date Author(s) Description

01 2014-07-18 KJ Initial revision
02 2014-10-02 KJ Added content in "Theory" and "Performing a Test"
and changed software screen shots to latest version
03 2016-09-19 CF Update Contact Information
04 2017-08-02 CF Updated documentation with OHV Suite software
05 2017-12-05 CF Added Remote Support Tool Description
06 2018-03-02 CF Updated DAC measurement section
07 2018-12-07 JP Added cable voltage input description
08 2019-03-18 CF/JP Updated information for M40 and H-Series
09 2019-04-30 HK Added application settings section, updated images
10 2019-09-27 PS Added section about updating. Updated some
screenshots of the analysis.
11 2019-12-10 CF Updated software documentation and images
12 2020-06-04 CF Updated technical data
13 2020-08-04 CF Added chapter for word reporting. Updated docu-
mentation and images.
14 2020-08-18 PS Updated word reporting section with more detailed
information.
15 2021-11-19 JP Added information about maximum operating alti-
tude.
16 2022-05-02 CF Added information for handling of accepting and re-
moving of locations in advanced analysis mode.
17 2022-05-30 YW Added information for filtering DAC shots, updated
screen shots.
18 2022-10-14 CF Added information to H-Series for the H200
19 2023-06-19 JP Updated formatting for technical data M- and H-
Series
20 2023-10-27 CF Added appendix chapter for capacitance diagrams
over target voltage
21 2023-11-29 CF/JP Added appendix chapter for altitude information
and list available languages
22 2025-04-02 CF Updated manual with screen shots and adjust doc-
umentation
23 2025-04-07 CF Added operating height vs. maximum output volt-
age diagram for H300

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Symbols and Abbreviations

Used Symbols

This symbol displays a warning message. Warnings are important information

which are used to highlight important facts and must not be ignored!

This symbol is used to provide additional information which are an addition

to the surrounding text and may be used to prevent ambiguities.

Abbreviations
DAC Damped Alternating Current
PD Partial Discharge
Q unit for apparent charge Q, quantified in pC (pico Coulomb)
HV High Voltage
TV Test Voltage
PRPDA Phase Resolved Partial Discharge Analysis
Df Damping Factor (do not confuse with dissipation factor / dielectric loss factor /
tan δ)
TDR Time Domain Reflectometry
SNR Signal-To-Noise Ratio
VT/PT Voltage Transformer / combined instrument transformer
TO Test Object

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Contents

1 Safety Considerations 1
1.1 Important Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 General Safety Rules and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Safety Precautions when Testing with DAC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Using the Safety Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4.1 During Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4.2 During HV Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.5 Error handling after power loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 Relevant Standards 5
2.1 General on-site testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Cable testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 Standardized PD detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

3 Introduction 6
3.1 Scope of Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.2 Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.2.1 DAC Voltage Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.2.2 Dissipation Factor Estimation Using DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2.3 Partial Discharge Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2.4 Partial discharge location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4 Hardware and Software Description 14

4.1 Technical Data M-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2 Parts List M-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.1 Basic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.2 Supplementary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.3 Technical Data H-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.4 Parts List H-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.4.1 Basic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.5 Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

5 Performing a Test 21
5.1 Before Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2 Setting-Up the Cable under Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.3 Setting-Up the Test for the M-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.3.1 Hardware Set-Up (M-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.4 Setting-Up the Test for the H-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.4.1 Hardware Set-Up (H-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.5 Perform the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.5.1 Setting-Up test information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.5.2 Setting-Up Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.5.3 Performing Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page v of 154

5.5.4 Performing HV Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

5.6 Starting the OHV Suite Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

6 DAC Catalog 30
6.1 DAC Catalog configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.2 Simple mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.2.1 Cable voltage input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.3 Advanced mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.3.1 Test Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.3.2 Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.3.3 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.3.4 Cable voltage inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.3.5 Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.3.6 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

7 DAC measurement 40
7.1 DAC measurement configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.1.1 General measurement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.1.2 Measurement parameter definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.1.3 Simple measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.1.4 Advanced measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.2 Apply safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.3.1 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
7.3.2 DAC measurement information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
7.3.3 DAC Measurement Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.4 PD Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7.5 TDR Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.5.1 TDR input parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.5.2 TDR result area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.5.3 TDR control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.6 DAC Measurement (Simple mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.6.1 UI elements for simple mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.6.2 Perform a DAC measurement in simple mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.7 DAC Measurement (Advanced mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.7.1 UI elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.7.2 Perform a DAC measurement in advanced mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.8 Double side Measurement (Simple mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.8.1 UI elements for simple mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.8.2 Perform a Double side measurement in simple mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.9 Double side Measurement (Advanced mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.9.1 UI elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.9.2 Perform a Double side measurement in advanced mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.10 VLF measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.10.1 UI elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.10.2 Perform a VLF measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.11 Leakage current measurement (LC measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.11.1 UI elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.11.2 Performing a LC measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.12 Control elements inside different measure modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.12.1 Add a comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.12.2 Add new voltage level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

8 DAC analysis 86
8.1 Analysis Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.1.1 General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.1.2 Reporting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page vi of 154

8.1.3 Simple Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

8.1.4 Advanced Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.2 Open file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.2.1 Select a test to analyze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.3 Result Overview after Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
8.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
8.3.2 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8.3.3 Data Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.3.4 TDR Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.3.5 Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.3.6 Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.3.7 VLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.3.8 Reflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.3.9 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.3.10 Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8.4 Import of old measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8.5 Double Side Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

9 DAC word report template 119

9.1 Word report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
9.2 Word report template syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
9.2.1 Basic placeholder usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
9.2.2 Basic statement usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
9.2.3 Conditional statement - IF statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
9.2.4 Filling template tables - FOR statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
9.3 Word report template content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
9.3.1 Word report template key for all report templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
9.3.2 Word report template key for DAC report templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
9.3.3 Word report template key for VLF report templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

10 DAC system synchronization 127

10.1 Synchronization hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.2 Synchronization view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

A General Information 129

A.1 General software structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
A.2 Start screen - Main application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
A.2.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
A.2.2 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

B General Application settings 136

B.1 Diagram Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
B.2 Scripting Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

C Software Update 137

C.1 Updating OHV Suite software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
C.1.1 Checking software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
C.1.2 Downloading software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
C.1.3 Installing software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
C.2 Updating device software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

D Connection manager 142

D.1 Manage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
D.1.1 Manual connection to DAC devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

E Remote support 148

E.1 Start remote support tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
E.2 Allow remote connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page vii of 154

F Test object capacitance diagrams 149

F.1 DAC M60 maximum available test object capacitance depending on test voltage . 149

G Test object altitude 150

G.1 Operating height depending to the maximum voltage for a H300 device . . . . . . 150

List of Figures 151

List of Tables 154

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

1
Safety Considerations

1.1 Important Safety Rules

Read the information below carefully before using this instrument.

Following general safety precautions have to be observed during op-

eration of this instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions
or with specific warning elsewhere in this manual violates safety stan-
dards for design, manufacture, and intended use of the instrument.

Each user should be aware of the contents of these guidelines before using the instrument. The
Ohv products should be handled only by skilled workers. Repairing and maintenance are only
allowed by well skilled experts. The measuring systems of Ohv are developed and tested according
to DIN EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electronic measuring set. The delivery of Ohv products
guarantees safe operation if the general safety guidelines are strictly be followed by the user. The
instruments of Ohv are designed for application under dry ambient condition, where the operation
temperature may range between +5 ℃ and +40 ℃. Since PD diagnosis tests are carried out on test
objects subjected to high voltage (HV), the rules for minimum safety working distance have strictly
to be followed, in order to prevent any dangerous situation. In this respect also the charging of
potential-free devices in the surroundings of HV lines has to be taken into account. Persons which
are not directly involved with the PD detection procedure must be kept away from the testing
area by means of suitable barriers clearly indicated by warning boards. Even if the testing voltage
is switched off, but the test object is not grounded by well visible conductors, nobody is allowed
to enter the measuring area. If possible, both, the test object and the HV test supply must be
installed within a closed safety testing area. All switching components must be equipped with
additional locking mechanism in order to prevent dangerous situations, such as the test voltage
being switched on by a non-authorized person. Never insert the main plug of measuring system in
socket, which is not grounded. It is not allowed to use mains connection leads without protective
conductor. To guarantee effective safety, the power plug should be inserted in the corresponding
instrument and should be connected to a socket, before other testing cable and measuring cable will
be connected. Before attaching of any measuring cable, a protective conductor should always be
connected to earth connection. In case of PD measurements in the standard circuit the protective
conductor must be joined with the grounding of the test area, which is provided with the measuring
impedance.

A break-off of protective conductor outside of the instrument and

a break-off of protecting earth connection could cause a dangerous
situation. Never disconnect the protective conductor.

Adjustment, repairing and maintenance are not allowed, when the device is opened and connected
to the supplying operating voltage. When a blown fuse has to be replaced, it should be guaranteed
that the spare fuse has the rated current range and is of the right type. Never use a short circuited
fuse. In case of any defect, switch off the device immediately. The internal protection unit of the
device becomes ineffective, if e.g. the measuring equipment:

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
1.2. GENERAL SAFETY RULES AND GROUNDING Page 2 of 154

Is damaged
Has been stored for long time under abnormal conditions
Has suffered transport damages.

PD detection is not allowed, if the well known general safety rules for working in the surroundings
of HV installations are not strictly followed by the operator. A periodic training of operators
on the basis of the above given instructions is recommended urgently. The regulations of the
DIN EN 50191:2000 Installation and Operating of Electrical Test Units as well as the given safety
requirements have to be kept conscientious!

1.2 General Safety Rules and Grounding

1 Disconnect power cable and discharge all high-voltage capacitors before testing.

2 Protect against re-energizing.

3 Confirm absence of voltage.

4 Ground all phases.

5 Cover or shield adjacent energized parts.

The DAC test equipment should be used by qualified personnel only. Make use of the grounding
stick for grounding the DAC system.

Good grounding of the high voltage apparatus is mandatory. The safety of the user cannot be
guaranteed without proper grounding of the DAC device and the screen of the high voltage test
lead. All metallic parts of the switchgear and the phases that are currently not tested should
remain grounded.

During testing keep clearance of at least 1.5 m (5 ft) to high voltage parts of the DAC device as
well as the cable under test.

1.3 Safety Precautions when Testing with DAC System

Use the DAC test system only as specified in this manual.
Do not use the DAC device if it is damaged. Before you use it inspect the casing and look
for cracks or missing parts.
Inspect the high voltage test leads for damaged insulation. Replace damaged test leads before
you use the DAC system.
Do not operate the DAC system around explosive gas, vapor, or wet environments.
Never use the device in wet conditions when there is water on the surface.
Always consider the maximum operating altitude of 2000m (above sea level).
Adjustments, repairs or maintenance work on the instrument should be carried out by qual-
ified manufacturer-trained personnel only.

1.4 Using the Safety Box

The high voltage can only be switched on with the connected auxiliary safety box. In case of
an emergency the red emergency button may be pushed for immediately switching off the high
voltage source.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
1.5. ERROR HANDLING AFTER POWER LOSS Page 3 of 154

Figure 1.1: DAC remote safety box

1.4.1 During Calibration

Calibration can only be performed with the safety box connected (Figure 1.1) and READY key
turned to I -position.

1 Make sure that the safety box is properly connected to the device

2 Turn READY key to the I -position; green HV ON button will light up

3 Unground the phase under test

4 Perform TDR and PD calibration (cf. Section 5.5)

1.4.2 During HV Test

High voltage can only be applied with the connected safety box, READY key turned to I -position,
and HV ON switched on.

1 Make sure that the safety box is properly connected to the device

2 Turn READY key to the I -position; green HV ON button will light up

3 Unground the phase under test

4 Click on HV ON button; red HV OFF button will light-up; now the device is ready for HV
test
5 Perform test (cf. Section 5.5)

6 Push HV OFF button; high voltage source will be de-energized

7 Turn READY key to O-position

8 Ground device

1.5 Error handling after power loss

The DAC system is powered through the power supply connector. If the power supply for the DAC
system is lost during a high voltage measurement the cable is still charged with DC and there is
not discharge performed. In such a case it is required to discharge the cable manually by using a
unloading bar and waiting at least 5 minutes before the cable is unloaded.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
1.5. ERROR HANDLING AFTER POWER LOSS Page 4 of 154

Direct grounding of the cable can damage the cable and DAC device!

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

2
Relevant Standards

2.1 General on-site testing

IEC 60060-3 High Voltage test techniques Part 3: Definitions and requirements for on-site
testing

2.2 Cable testing

IEEE 400 Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable
Systems Rated 5 kV and Above
IEEE 400.4 Guide for Field-Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems Rated 5 kV and Above
with Damped Alternating Current Voltage (DAC)
IEC 60502-2 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from
6 kV (Um = 7, 2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
VDE Dresden Recommended practice for the commissioning test of medium voltage cables

2.3 Standardized PD detection

IEEE 400.3 Guide for PD Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems in a Field Environment
IEC 60270 Partial discharges measurements
IEC 60885-3 Test methods for partial discharges measurements on lengths of extruded power
cable

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

3
Introduction

This chapter gives you a quick theory part, and introduction to all the features and capabilities of
the DAC test equipment.

3.1 Scope of Application

DAC voltage test and diagnostic measurements (partial discharge and loss factor) provide for
reliable detection of

Poor installation,
Failures due to inappropriate laying,
Failures in accessories or
Deterioration in cable insulation due to aging.

It allows much more than a simple go or no-go decision. DAC testing is an advanced maintenance
tool which supports asset management and grid operation as well.

Withstand voltage test method with test voltages representing operational stresses.
Sensitive PD measurement and location in complete cable systems (insulation and acces-
sories).
Assessment of cable aging status in comparison with other cables based on dissipation factor
(tan δ) estimation.

On-site DAC voltage test in combination with non-destructive PD and loss

factor measurement is unique and fundamental for reliable service of newly
installed, repaired or service-aged cable systems. The DAC test voltage as well
as the partial discharge measurement complies with national and international
standards for on-site testing.

3.2 Theory
3.2.1 DAC Voltage Testing
DAC voltage generation
DAC voltage is generated by energizing the capacitive test object (cable) up to the pre-selected
peak test voltage by a high voltage source within a couple of seconds. When the test voltage is
reached, the HV switch closes instantly providing LC resonance circuit with the cable capacitance
and the system inductance (according to Figure 3.2). This provides a damped sinusoidal AC
(DAC) voltage. Depending on the capacitance of the test object the AC frequency fres (3.1)
typically varies in the range from 40 to a few hundreds of Hz.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
3.2. THEORY Page 7 of 154

Figure 3.1: DAC voltage shape (50 Hz) with damping curve

Figure 3.2: DAC testing equipment illustration

1
fres = √ (3.1)
2π LCcable
Since the DAC frequency of the test voltage is close to nominal AC service conditions, all AC
voltage stresses and measured PD activities can be effectively evaluated and are comparable with
the service conditions under power frequency. In case of harmful insulation defects, a breakdown
may occur inside the test object. In addition, the PD inception voltage (PDIV) and PD extinction
voltage (PDEV) are measured. The dissipation factor can be estimated due to the decaying
amplitude of the test voltage (see also Figure 3.1).

DAC Test Procedure

Unlike continuous AC stress the DAC test is performed in pre-defined sequences of charging and
discharging cycles (Standard IEEE 400 and Standard IEC 60060-3, cf. Section 2). During the
DAC voltage test, a designated number of DAC excitations is applied to the test object for each
voltage level. See Figure 3.3 for an example test procedure.

3.2.2 Dissipation Factor Estimation Using DAC

One simple model of an insulation system at one specific frequency, voltage and temperature is
the equivalent circuit consisting of the cable capacitance and its resistance in parallel according to
Figure 3.4.
Based on the series equivalent circuit the dissipation factor (tan δ) is calculated from the relation
between active and reactive power (3.2):

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
3.2. THEORY Page 8 of 154

Figure 3.3: Example test procedure for DAC test

Figure 3.4: basic parallel equivalent circuit of an insulation system

P u2 1 1
tan δ = = = (3.2)
Q R u2 ωC ωRC
During the high voltage oscillation period the resistance R results in voltage damping. The en-
veloping damping curve can be mathematically described with following proportionality (3.3):
t
u(t) ∝ e− RC (3.3)
The higher the overall losses (including the dissipation factor of the cable insulation) are, the
more distinct the damping characteristic is. Knowing the exact losses of the test equipment the
dissipation factor of the cable insulation under test can be derived.
The damping factor Df referred to Figure 3.5 and Equation (3.4) can be used to quantify the
damping characteristic (Standard IEC 60060-3 ).
a1
Df = 1 − (3.4)
a0
With the measured damping factor from (3.4) and the test frequency f = ω
2π the time constant
RC from Formula (3.10) can be determined:
1
RC = − (3.5)
f ln [1 − Df ]
Note, that Df includes the overall losses tan δ (3.6) of the test circuit, including losses inside
P
the DAC equipment, contact resistance, and cable insulation losses.
X 1
tan δ = − ln [1 − Df ] (3.6)
π
Moreover, all quantities strongly depend on temperature (T ), voltage level (u) and frequency (ω).
Hence, the absolute dissipation factor of the cable tan δcable can only be estimated. However, the
voltage tip-up, as well as relations between phases, or between former tests can still be successfully
analyzed.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
3.2. THEORY Page 9 of 154

Figure 3.5: Damping factor

According to the IEC 60060-3 standard the damping factor Df can reach up
to 40 %.

The simplest liner model for the estimated losses inside the test equipment is a LR series circuit
according to Figure 3.6 and Formula (3.7). Note, that the losses inside the resistance RDAC also
depend on temperature (T ), voltage level (u) and frequency (ω).

Figure 3.6: Simple model for loses inside DAC test circuit

P i2 RDAC RDAC
tan δDAC = = 2 = (3.7)
Q i ωL ωL
Finally, the dielectric losses tan δcable inside the cable insulation can be estimated to (3.8):
X
tan δcable = tan δ − tan δDAC (3.8)

3.2.3 Partial Discharge Detection

Partial discharges indicate inhomogeneities within high voltage insulation systems. For this reason
sensitive detecting as well as exact locating of PD signals are important requirements for condition
assessment of high voltage equipment.
The PRPDA pattern analysis is a well-proven method to separate real PD signals from noise and
other disturbance signals. Therefore, the first cycle of several DAC excitations (shots) with the
same amplitude are superposed in one diagram, according to Illustration 3.7. As a result, typical
phase resolved patterns are generated depending on the PD type. If there is no indication for PD
activity during testing no further PD analysis such as PD location is needed.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
3.2. THEORY Page 10 of 154

Figure 3.7: PRPDA pattern generation from several shots

The PRPDA pattern generation (as presented in Figure 3.7) provides you the
same evaluation possibilities as during continuous AC test. The more shots
with the same amplitude are superposed the better the PRPDA result will be.
There are typical pattern shapes generated by specific types of PD. Harmful
surface discharges as well as inner PD generate phase resolved patterns between
0 to 90, and 180 to 270 degrees. Refer to Section 2 for further information.

The quantization of the PD level in pC (pico coulomb) requires the test circuit
to be calibrated according to the IEC60270 standard. After calibration the
test setup must not be changed in any way. Note, that in most cases one
calibration is sufficient for all three phases.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
3.2. THEORY Page 11 of 154

3.2.4 Partial discharge location

Figure 3.8: PD location mapping from selected PD signals

For locating the PD signals single sided TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) is performed on the
selected areas of the first cycle (see Figure 3.8).

Note, that the distinction of real PD from noise signals still is hand work. The
automatic algorithm assumes that every found reflection is a PD signal. After
the automatic analysis the test engineer should be able to separate real PD
events from noise, and correcting it manually.

Principle of Time Domain Reflectometry

In Figure 3.9 the generation of a typical PD signal reflectogram for a PD event starting at time t0
at a distance x = s from near end is illustrated:

At t0 the ignited PD signal is split in two portions: the direct pulse is propagating directly
to the near end, and the indirect pulse is propagating to the far end.
The direct pulse is reaching the PD detector at t1 .
In the meanwhile, the indirect pulse is still propagating towards the opened far end L where
it is being reflected.
The reflected signal is propagationg towards the near end. At t2 it is being detected as a
lower and wider second pulse.

By knowing the overall cable length L, the group propagation speed vg of the PD pulse, and the
time distance ∆t = t2 − t1 between the direct and indirect PD pulse the location s of the PD
source can be calculated using Formula (3.9).

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
3.2. THEORY Page 12 of 154

Figure 3.9: Generation of a PD signal reflectogram

1
s = L − vg ∆t (3.9)
2

Finding reflections
The automatic algorithm uses the damping curve which has been calculated during TDR calibra-
tion (see Figure 3.10). The damping curve is a mathematical model describing the exponential
damping α of the signal amplitude when propagating along the cable length.

q2 = q1 · e−α2L (3.10)

Figure 3.10: Damping curve of PD signal damping

During TDR calibration the amplitude q1 of the direct calibration pulse is compared to the am-
plitude q2 of the indirect pulse after having traveled twice the cable length L. The exponential
approach from (3.10) results in Formula (3.11) for the damping α.

ln qq21
α= (3.11)
2L
The main difficulty during TDR analysis is to finding the correspondent reflection of the direct
signal, because of

high damping inside the insulation (high dielectric losses) that lead to low amplitudes of the
direct pulse and reflection,
high damping due to long cable that lead to low amplitudes of the reflection,

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
3.2. THEORY Page 13 of 154

superposed wide-band noise signals which could lead to misinterpretation,

dispersion of direct and indirect pulse (different frequency portions of the wide-band PD sig-
nal propagate with different velocities) that leads to change of pulse shape (see Figure 3.11),
joint reflections which attenuate the signal and interfere with far-end reflections,
and overlapping of different PD events.

Figure 3.11: PD signal (a) before and (b) after having traveled approx. 800 meters
inside XLPE cable

Displaying TDR results

Every single PD event is automatically analyzed and transferred into a PD map (Figure 3.8).

The PD map in Figure 3.8 is illustrating the location of the PD signals inside the cable. Conspic-
uous concentrations at particular locations indicate insulation defects.

Note, that most of PD related insulation defects occur inside cable accessories.
The joint locations may give you good orientation for finding the exact PD
location.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

4
Hardware and Software Description

4.1 Technical Data M-Series

DAC M30 DAC M60 DAC M30+

Maximum output voltage

DAC: 30 kV (peak) 60 kV (peak) 40 kV (peak)
21,2 kV (RMS) 42,4 kV (RMS) 28,3 kV (RMS)
VLF: 33 kV (peak)
23,3 kV (RMS)

Minimum output voltage 3 kV (peak) 6 kV (peak) 3 kV (peak)

2,12 kV (RMS) 4,24 kV (RMS) 2,12 kV (RMS)

Rated coil inductance 1,0 H 1,5 H 1,0 H

DAC frequency 1
35 . . . 800 Hz 35 . . . 800 Hz 35 . . . 800 Hz

2
Test object capacitance
DAC: 0,025 . . . 5 µF 0,025 . . . 8 µF 0,025 . . . 5 µF
VLF: 0,025 . . . 3 µF

Test object length 1

50 m . . . > 10 km

Power supply 94 . . . 250 V, 48 . . . 63 Hz, 500 VA

Data acquisition 105 MS/s, 14 Bit vertical resolution

PD measuring range 2 pC . . . 100 nC

PD integration Wide-band integration (acc. to IEC60270)

Optimized integrator for higher SNR

DF, Tan δ estimation 0,1 % . . . 50 % (Resolution 0,01 %)

Protocol TCP/IP

Operating temperature -5 . . . 40 deg.

Operating altitude < 2000m (above sea level)

Dimensions
77 cm 107 cm 77 cm
(without wheels)

Continued on next page

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.1. TECHNICAL DATA M-SERIES Page 15 of 154

Table 4.1 – Continued from previous page

DAC M30 DAC M60 DAC M30+

Weight
approx. 75 kg approx. 85 kg approx. 90 kg
(device only)

DAC M40 DAC M40+

Maximum output voltage 40 kV (peak) 40 kV (peak)

28,3 kV (RMS) 28,3 kV (RMS)

Minimum output voltage 3 kV (peak) 4 kV (peak)

2,12 kV (RMS) 2,83 kV (RMS)

Rated coil inductance 1,0 H 1,0 H

DAC frequency 1
35 . . . 800 Hz 35 . . . 800 Hz

Test object capacitance 2

0,025 . . . 5 µF 0,025 . . . 5 µF
Test object length 1 50 m . . . > 10 km

Power supply 94 . . . 250 V, 48 . . . 63 Hz, 500 VA

Data acquisition 105 MS/s, 14 Bit vertical resolution

PD measuring range 2 pC . . . 100 nC

PD integration Wide-band integration (acc. to IEC60270)

Optimized integrator for higher SNR

DF, Tan δ estimation 0,1 % . . . 50 % (Resolution 0,01 %)

Protocol TCP/IP

Operating temperature -5 . . . 40 deg.

Operating altitude 3 < 2000m (above sea level)

Dimensions
77 cm 77 cm
(without wheels)

Weight
approx. 75 kg approx. 90 kg
(device only)

1 Depending on load capacitance

2 Depending on the test voltage (cf. Appendix F)
3 See Appendix G for details

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.2. PARTS LIST M-SERIES Page 16 of 154

4.2 Parts List M-Series

4.2.1 Basic Equipment
B01 - High Voltage Unit
Consisting of:

wide-band power supply input

high voltage charger
high voltage solid state switch
air coil (standard: 1 H)
DC and AC voltage divider
coupling capacitor and coupling device
for PD measurement
rolls and carrying bars

B02 - High voltage connection cable

Consisting of:

MC connectors (female)
including MC connector clamp
including grounding clamp
standard length: 7,5 m

B03 - Safety Box

Including:

1 pair of safety keys

approx. 5 m of connection cable

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.2. PARTS LIST M-SERIES Page 17 of 154

B04 - Calibrator

Including:

BNC to 4 mm connection leads, 1 m

(black and red)
Connection clamps
Test certificate

B05 - Grounding Stick

Grounding stick

B06 - OHV Suite

Consisting of:

latest measurement software

latest analyzer software
including documentation, technical sup-
port and software updates

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.2. PARTS LIST M-SERIES Page 18 of 154

4.2.2 Supplementary Equipment

S01 - Cable accessory connection box

Consisting of:

adapter for T-connectors M12 and M14

adapter for bus bars
electrodes for PD free assembly

S02 - Spare MC connector clamp

Spare MC connector clamp

S03 - Base load capacitor

rated capacitance: 200 nF

rated voltage: 60 kV
including high frequency suppression fil-
ter
including connection leads to DAC de-
vice

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.3. TECHNICAL DATA H-SERIES Page 19 of 154

4.3 Technical Data H-Series

The technical data of the H-Series can be found in the system-specific manual.

4.4 Parts List H-Series

4.4.1 Basic Equipment
B01 - High Voltage Unit
Consisting of:
wide-band power supply input
high voltage charger
high voltage solid state switch
air coil
DC and AC voltage divider
coupling capacitor and coupling device for PD measurement
Base load (optional)
Double side unit for range extension (optional)
Intermediate DAC unit for join measurements (optional)

B02 - High voltage connection cable

Consisting of:
2 cables (10 m and 5 m)
connection adapter
including grounding clamp

B03 - Calibrator

Including:
BNC to 4 mm connection leads, 1 m
(black and red)
Connection clamps
Test certificate

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.5. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Page 20 of 154

B04 - Grounding Stick

Grounding stick

B05 - OHV Suite

Consisting of:
latest measurement software
latest analyzer software
including documentation, technical sup-
port and software updates

4.5 Software requirements

This section describes (cf. Table 4.3) the minimum requirements for PC or Laptop hardware on
which the OHV Suite should be run.

Description Minimum requirement

RAM 4 GB

Display resolution WSXGA (1440 x 900 Pixel)

Free hard drive space 2 GB

Operating System Windows 10 (64bit) or Windows 11 (64bit)

Table 4.3: Software requirements

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

5
Performing a Test

This chapter teaches you how to setting-up up your DAC testing device, and how to perform a
test for the first time.

5.1 Before Testing

Make sure that the operator of the power cable under test provides you all mandatory information
needed for performing the test which at least includes:

Cable operating voltage (U0 ),

Exact cable length,
Joint positions,
Type of cable terminations,
Test procedure / maximum voltage level

Note, that you are able fill-in and save the needed information in the software
test set-up in your office without the hardware set-up. Doing this will save you
time on site.

In some cases the cable operator does not know the exact cable length. In this
case you need to perform a cable length estimation using TDR calibration or
with the help of a reflectometer. For the signal propagation velocity vg , which
depends on the insulation material and thickness, the cable manufacturer may
provide the right value.

5.2 Setting-Up the Cable under Test

Working on power equipment in substations must be performed by qualified

personnel only. Consider local safety relevant rules before starting any modifi-
cation of the installation

In the substations all VTs and PTs usually connected to the cable should remain disconnected
during calibration and testing, otherwise the DAC device will not be able to charge the cable.
When calibrating and testing both the cable far end and near end must remain ungrounded.
Groundings of the cable screens must remain grounded.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.3. SETTING-UP THE TEST FOR THE M-SERIES Page 22 of 154

If you test phase-by-phase the two remaining phases must be grounded manually.
Use the grounding stick for the phase under test for grounding.
It is recommended that all capacitive voltage indicators of the switchgear fields that remain
connected to the high voltage must be grounded while testing.
For measurements on very short cable runs, the use of the base load capacitor is recom-
mended. This increases the capacitance of the test object and reduces the DAC frequency.
The base load capacitor is connected directly to another branch on the DAC device in par-
allel with the cable under test using the high voltage connection cable included in the scope
of delivery.

5.3 Setting-Up the Test for the M-Series

Please consider safety notes before setting-up any DAC test. All phases must remain grounded
while setting-up the test.

Figure 5.1: Connecting the DAC device (M-Series)

5.3.1 Hardware Set-Up (M-Series)

The basic DAC test device consists of the high voltage source, high voltage connection cable, safety
box, calibrator, grounding stick and remote laptop.
1 Connect the high voltage cable to the cable termination under test (ref. to Figure 5.1).
Use the connection clamp or applicable connection tools from the connection box for cable
accessories.
2 Ground the high voltage cable screen at substation ground, and as close as possible to the
grounding of the cable under test.
3 Align the DAC equipment near cable termination. Consider clearance of at least 0.15 meters
to all nearby metallic parts.
4 Connect the other end of the high voltage cable to the DAC equipment.

5 Ground the base plate of the DAC equipment via cable screen of the high voltage cable.

6 Connect grounding stick to DAC equipment.

7 Connect control unit to power supply (ref. to Figure 5.2).

8 Connect remote laptop to control unit via Ethernet cable (ref. to Figure 5.2).

9 Connect safety box to control unit (ref. to Figure 5.2).

10 Switch-on DAC device and laptop.

In Figure 5.2 all available connectors and labels are marked on the control unit with 1 to 8 .
Each of them will be described in Table 5.1.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.3. SETTING-UP THE TEST FOR THE M-SERIES Page 23 of 154

Consider good and short grounding between the DAC test device and the
substation grounding. For higher SNR avoid grounding loops in your test set-
up (e.g. multiple groundings and long grounding lines).

90-230 V, 50/60 Hz, 6 A

C WARNING SAFETY
NETWORK
EXT. LAMP BOX
0 1

1 POWER HV ON

4 5 7
2 3 6 M xx 8

Figure 5.2: Available connections on the control unit (M-Series)

Element Description

1 Power supply with switch for power on / off and the fuse with 6 A

2 The power LED, which is green when the device is powered on.

3 The high voltage LED. This LED is illuminated red when the high voltage is
on.

4 BNC Connector for the external C.

5 Connector used for external warning lamp.

6 This label contains the name of the DAC device (this could be M30, M60 or
M30+).

7 Connector for the safety box.

8 The network connection for the Ethernet.

Table 5.1: Available connections on the control unit (M-Series)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.4. SETTING-UP THE TEST FOR THE H-SERIES Page 24 of 154

5.4 Setting-Up the Test for the H-Series

Please consider safety notes before setting-up any DAC test. All phases must remain grounded
while setting-up the test.

L1 L2 L3

(a) Connecting the H180 / H200 DAC device

L1 L2 L3

(b) Connecting the H300 DAC device

Figure 5.3: Connecting the H-Series DAC device

5.4.1 Hardware Set-Up (H-Series)

The H-Series DAC test device consists of a separate high voltage source, high voltage switch (only
H-300), high voltage coils, high voltage connection cable, safety box, calibrator, grounding stick
and remote laptop.

1 Connect the high voltage cable to the cable termination under test (ref. to Figure 5.3).
Use the connection clamp or applicable connection tools from the connection box for cable
accessories. Please choose the correct connections based on the specific H-Series model (H180,
H200 or H300).

2 Ground the high voltage cable screen at substation ground, and as close as possible to the
grounding of the cable under test.
3 Align the DAC equipment near cable termination. Consider clearance of at least 0.15 meters
to all nearby metallic parts.
4 Connect the other end of the high voltage cable to the DAC equipment.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.4. SETTING-UP THE TEST FOR THE H-SERIES Page 25 of 154

5 Ground the base plate of the DAC equipment via cable screen of the high voltage cable.

6 Connect grounding stick to DAC equipment.

7 Connect control unit to power supply (ref. to Figure 5.4).

8 Connect remote laptop to control unit via Ethernet cable (ref. to Figure 5.4).

9 Connect safety box to control unit (ref. to Figure 5.4).

10 Switch-on DAC device and laptop.

Consider good and short grounding between the DAC test device and the
substation grounding. For higher SNR avoid grounding loops in your test set-
up (e.g. multiple groundings and long grounding lines).

90-230 V, 50/60 Hz, 6 A

C WARNING SAFETY
NETWORK
EXT. LAMP BOX
0 1

1 POWER HV ON

4 5 7
2 3 6 H xx 8

Figure 5.4: Available connections on the control unit (H-Series)

In Figure 5.4 all available connectors and labels are marked on the control unit with 1 to 8 .
Each of them will be described in Table 5.2.

Element Description

1 Power supply with switch for power on / off and the fuse with 6 A

2 The power LED, which is green when the device is powered on.

3 The high voltage LED. This LED is illuminated red when the high voltage is
on.

4 BNC Connector for the external C.

5 Connector used for external warning lamp.

6 This label contains the name of the DAC device (this could be H180, H200 or
H300).

7 Connector for the safety box.

8 The network connection for the Ethernet.

Table 5.2: Available connections on the control unit (H-Series)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.5. PERFORM THE TEST Page 26 of 154

5.5 Perform the test

This section describes how to perform a complete test. The individual settings in the software are
not dealt with directly, but only refer to the corresponding chapters in this manual. The sequence
of the subsections in this section describes the normal procedure for a DAC test measurement.

5.5.1 Setting-Up test information

In order to carry out a test, some information must be specified for the test. This information
can be selected or re-entered via the Test catalog. Detailed information about the UI elements
of the Test catalog is explained in Chapter 6. For a quick input of the required information it is
recommended to use the simple mode (cf. Figure 6.3) of the Test catalog. All relevant information
such as cable information, test environment, testers and test procedures can be entered or selected
there.

5.5.2 Setting-Up Calibrator

During calibration process important parameters for the PD measurement are set. This includes

the group velocity vg of the PD signals inside the cable (TDR calibration),
time constant of the damping between first pulse and far-end reflection (TDR calibration),
check and adjustment of cable length, and check for joint reflections (TDR calibration),
scaling factor (k-factor) for correct scaling of the pC values (pC calibration)

The calibrator must be connected directly to the cable termination leads (according to Figures 5.5).
Check the right calibrator polarity: Connect red wire to conductor, and black wire to cable screen.
During calibration the phase under test must remain ungrounded. All other phases must remain
grounded.

5.5.3 Performing Calibration

Before proceeding to the DAC Measurement make sure that the DAC device is switched on, and
the computer is connected to the device via Ethernet link. Additionally it is necessary to establish
a connection to the device in the Connection Manager (cf. Chapter D).
The calibration procedure itself consists of two independent parts:
1 Charge calibration: in the Q [pC] calibration the scaling factors between the apparent
charge of the calibrator and the measured charge are determined.
2 TDR calibration: the main purpose of the TDR calibration is the determination of relevant
signal parameters, such as the signal propagation velocity and the damping curve between
direct and reflected pulse. The entire reflectogram will be saved for reference purposes for
the analysis software.

Charge Calibration
For the charge calibration of the cable is performed in the Calibration window of the DAC mea-
surement. The individual UI elements are explained in detail in the Section 7.4. The following
steps must be performed to obtain a successful calibration.

1 Phase under test must be left ungrounded during calibration.

2 Make sure the safety box is connected. Turn safety key so the green LED is illuminated.

3 Choose the same pC level as Calibration Input, which you have selected on the calibrator.

4 Start the calibration (button Calibration) inside the Calibration window.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.5. PERFORM THE TEST Page 27 of 154

(a) Setting-up calibration for M-Series

Calibrator

L1 L2 L3

(b) Setting-up calibration for H180 / H200 DAC device

Calibrator

L1 L2 L3

(c) Setting-up calibration for H300 DAC device

Figure 5.5: Setting-up calibration

5 Check the retrieved data for a valid signal to noise ratio (cf. Figure 7.8c in Section 7.4)

6 Adjust Attenuation: If the attenuation is too low or too high a visual indicator and a warning
will be shown (Figure 7.8a and Figure 7.8b). Increase or decrease the attenuation accordingly
until the bar is green.
7 If you have a good signal to noise ratio such as in Figure 7.8c click Save.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.5. PERFORM THE TEST Page 28 of 154

For a three phase cable system the calibration on one phase is enough in most
cases. If you feel the phase lengths deviate too much from each other you may
also perform a calibration for each phase.

A calibrator of type RC (ReChargeable) can not be loaded at the same time

when a TDR or PD calibration is performed!

TDR Calibration
The TDR calibration is performed to determine the length of the cable or the propagation speed
of the cable. To carry out this calibration, one of these values must be known. The detailed
overview of the available UI elements and the corresponding function description is described in
the Section 7.5. The following steps must be performed to obtain a successful TDR.

1 Make sure that the calibrator is connected with the right polarity (red lead to HV, black to
ground). Phase under test must be left ungrounded during calibration.

2 Inject 10 nC into the test circuit. Switch calibrator to this position

3 Make sure the safety box is connected. Turn safety key so the green LED is illuminated.

4 Select the estimated cable length. The selected or entered length must be greater
than the real length of the cable!
5 Click on Data Acquisition (cf. Figure 7.9 in Section 7.5) which starts the permanent data
acquisition for the calibration.
6 The signal on the channel is shown on the scope screen (cf. Figure 7.10c).

7 Adjust Attenuation: Adjust Attenuation: If the attenuation is too low or too high a visual
indicator and a warning will be shown (Figure 7.10a). Increase or decrease the attenuation
accordingly until the bar is green.
8 Check cursor positions for the first peak and the second highest peak (reflection).

9 Check that the calculated length matches the expected length. If this is not the case, the
propagation velocity should be slightly adjusted.
10 If you have a good reflectogram such as in Figure 7.10c stop the acquisition and use the Save
button to save the calibration.

The minimum cable length for performing automatic TDR calibration is 400 m.

5.5.4 Performing HV Test

After PD and TDR calibration has been completed successfully, the high voltage measurement can
now be performed. In this section, the sequence of a high-voltage measurement is briefly written.
To do this, you have to switch to the DAC or VLF window in the DAC measurement software. The
individual surface elements available for measurement are described in detail in the sections 7.6,
7.7 resp. 7.10 in detail.
To be able to carry out the high-voltage test, the test must be started by click on the button Begin
test. A message box appears that the calibrator has to be removed (cf. Figure 7.16). Furthermore,
the high voltage must be switched on. To do this, press the HV ON button on the safety box.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.6. STARTING THE OHV SUITE SOFTWARE Page 29 of 154

Before a high-voltage measurement can be carried out, the calibrator must be

removed! The calibrator will be damaged if it is not removed before the high
voltage test.

Depending on the selected measurement type, various actions are available to perform the mea-
surement. The exact details can be read separately in the above sections. After having finished
the HV test switch off the high voltage by clicking on the red button on the safety box.

5.6 Starting the OHV Suite Software

Start the measurement software OHV Suite. The Welcome-screen will appear (Figure 5.6). You
can select one of the following actions:

Connection Manager for connecting to the DAC Device (cf. Section D).
Test Catalog for setting-up test information (cf. Section 6).
Measurement for performing a predefined test procedure (cf. Section 7).
Analysis for analyzing an already performed test (cf. Section 8).

Figure 5.6: DAC system software: Welcome window

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

6
DAC Catalog

This chapter describes the structure of the DAC Catalog, which is available for entering test
information. The test information are required to perform a DAC test. The information entered
is stored in a database. The Chapter 6.1 describes the different configuration options for the
DAC Catalog. The Chapter 6.2 contains the description for the simple input mode of the test
information. Chapter 6.3 describes the input options in advanced mode.

6.1 DAC Catalog configuration

The configuration for the DAC Catalog consists of three parts (Figure 6.1 shows these parts). In
the upper area ( A ) the current path for the database is shown, where the data of the DAC Catalog
are stored. The middle section ( B ) allows you to switch between the Simple and Advanced mode
for entering test information. The lower area ( C ) displays the current location for the DAC
measurements. With the help of the button Select Data Folder another directory can be selected
for saving the measurement data. If a different folder than the default folder is selected, the button
Reset to Default Folder (cf. Figure 6.2) can be used to switch back to the default folder.

Figure 6.1: General overview for the DAC Catalog

Figure 6.2: Reset to Default Folder

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.2. SIMPLE MODE Page 31 of 154

6.2 Simple mode

The Simple mode for entering test information can be selected via the Test information button in
the application area. The left pane now shows the currently selected information for the test (cf.
Figure 6.3). The following information are required for a test:

Location indicates the location of the measurement

Cable indicates the structure of the cable
Tester Specifies the tester who carries out the measurement
Test procedure specifies the test sequence of the test

Figure 6.3: Simple Mode view

For all required information a combo box with a list of available Location, Cables, Tester or Test
procedures appears. The available data can be selected via these selection fields. For deleting a
single element the button can be used. If new information needs to be entered for the test,
this can be done directly in the individual input fields. Make sure that all available information
is filled in. If there is a change in the input fields, the button Save ( A in Figure 6.4) appears at
the bottom. Clicking this button saves the changes to the DAC Catalog database.

Figure 6.4: Modified test information in Simple Mode

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.2. SIMPLE MODE Page 32 of 154

6.2.1 Cable voltage input

The cable voltage input is available through a separate dialog. The dialog is automatically opened
when the input field (U0) is selected. Figure 6.5 (Selection A ) shows the input dialog. The
voltage value may be specified as RMS or peak value. Only one value needs to be entered as the
other value is automatically calculated. The dialog can be closed through pressing the ESC key or
using the available close button. If a valid voltage value was entered the dialog is automatically
closed and the voltage value is applied.

Figure 6.5: Cable voltage input in simple mode

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. ADVANCED MODE Page 33 of 154

6.3 Advanced mode

If the Advanced mode for test information input is selected, a separate window is available for each
information. Additional buttons are available in the application area to switch to the individual
input modes. A in Figure 6.6 shows all possible buttons of the input modes.

Figure 6.6: Advanced confiugruation mode

The next sections explain the individual input options in detail.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. ADVANCED MODE Page 34 of 154

6.3.1 Test Locations

The test environment contains information about the geographical location of the measurement.
Optional information can be set to facilitate the subsequent location of examinations. This makes
it possible, for example, to search for all examination locations in a country at a later date. These
optional properties are displayed by pressing the Show all Options button. Table 6.1 and Figure 6.7
show all possible entries for the test location.

ID Description Optional

City The city where the test is conducted. Yes

Country The country in which the test is carried out. Yes

Location The location where the test is performed. No

Postal Code The postal code of the test environment. Yes

Substation Far The name of the test station at the far end. No

Substation Near The name of the test station at the near end. No

Table 6.1: Test location options

The button Save writes the newly created test environment to the database and automatically
sets this environment to all selected test environment.

Figure 6.7: New test location

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. ADVANCED MODE Page 35 of 154

6.3.2 Tester
The examiner contains the name and company of the person performing the test. Further infor-
mation can also be added by pressing Show all Options. Table 6.2 and Figure 6.8 show all possible
entries for the tester.

ID Description Optional

Address The address of the tester Yes

Company The company in which the tester is employed No

Contact details Possible contact details of the tester Yes

Name The name of the tester No

Table 6.2: Tester options

The button Save writes the newly created tester to the database and automatically sets this as
selected tester.

Figure 6.8: New tester

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. ADVANCED MODE Page 36 of 154

6.3.3 Cable
The cable comprises the physical properties of the cable to be tested. Here too, additional infor-
mation such as joint configuration can be entered by pressing Show all Options. Table 6.3 and
Figure 6.9 show all possible entries for the cable.

ID Description Optional

Cores The existing cores in the cable. Yes

Date of manufacture The manufacturing date of the cable. No

Length The length of the cable. No

Material The material of the cable sheath. Yes

Cable ID Contains the identification for the cable. No

Topology The inner structure of the cable. No

U The nominal voltage of the cable. Yes

U0 The conductor-earth voltage of the cable. No

Um The highest permissible operating voltage. Yes

Velocity The electromagnetic propagation velocity in the cable. No

Table 6.3: Cable options

The button Save writes the newly created cable to the database and automatically sets it as the
selected cable.

Figure 6.9: New Cable

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. ADVANCED MODE Page 37 of 154

6.3.4 Cable voltage inputs

The cable voltage inputs are available through a separate dialog. The dialog is automatically
opened when one of the input fields (U, U0, Um) is selected. Figure 6.5 (Selection A ) shows the
input dialog. The voltage value may be specified as RMS or peak value. Only one value needs
to be entered as the other value is automatically calculated. The dialog can be closed through
pressing the ESC key or using the available close button. If a valid voltage value was entered the
dialog is automatically closed and the voltage value is applied.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. ADVANCED MODE Page 38 of 154

6.3.5 Customer
The customer contains all customer-specific measurement data. Table 6.4 and Figure 6.10 show
all possible entries for the customer.

ID Description Optional

Address The customer’s address No

Company The company acting as customer No

Contact details Additional contact information. Yes

Contact person Contact person of the company No

Description Additional description. Yes

References Further customer contacts. Yes

Table 6.4: Customer options

The button Save writes the newly created customer to the database and automatically sets it as
the selected customer.

Figure 6.10: New customer

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. ADVANCED MODE Page 39 of 154

6.3.6 Test Procedure

In the Test Procedure window (Figure 6.11) the test procedure for the DAC measurement is set
(cf. Table 6.5). Either you can load an existing test procedure, or you can create a new one.
The Type specifies the input method for adding the voltage level. Here you can switch between
Relative Voltage Level and Absolute Voltage Level. For adding a voltage sequence simply fill-in the
amount of shots and the voltage step U/U0 , and click on Add. Insert the desired voltage value,
and press Enter-key. For deleting a sequence click on the corresponding row and press Remove.
Your custom test procedure will be saved for future tests.

ID Description Optional

Name A descriptive Name for the test procedure. No

Steps A list of all voltage level steps which form the procedure. No

Type The method for applying the voltage levels. No

Table 6.5: Test procedure options

The button Save writes the newly created test procedure to the database and automatically sets
it as the selected test procedure.

Figure 6.11: New test procedure

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

7
DAC measurement

This chapter describes how to use the DAC measurement software to perform a test on a cable.
The next sections describe the individual UI elements in detail.
The DAC configuration contains the Analysis Configuration and the Measurement Configuration.
Switching between both configuration can be done by the buttons on the bottom of the Dac Settings
view. Inside Section 7.1 the different configuration options are described for the measurement
setting. These allows to make settings which are applied during the measurement. The following
sections describe the individual UI elements that are available for each connected device. The
sequence during a check is adhered to. The general overview (Section 7.3) refers to starting a
new check and the individual problems that may occur. The Section 7.4 describes how to use
the software for a charge calibration. Section 7.5 describes the use of TDR calibration. In the
Sections 7.6, 7.7 and 7.10 the interface elements available for the different high voltage tests are
explained. The concluding Section 7.12 describes generally used UI elements, which are available
at the different points during the measurement.

7.1 DAC measurement configuration

The measurement configuration consists of four parts, which can be seen in the Image 7.1. In the
upper area ( A ) you can switch between different measurement modes. The B section shows the
general settings. The third section C provides updating measurement parameter definition file.
The last section D provides various settings for the individual measurement modes.

7.1.1 General measurement settings

The general measurement settings are used for all available measurement modes. The Voltage
axis autorange check box activates the automatic axis scaling of the high voltage axis during
measurement. If this option is not active, the voltage axis is displayed with a fixed scaling. This
maximum scaling depends on which DAC device is used.

7.1.2 Measurement parameter definitions

The measurement parameter definition contains several parameters which allows to modify some
special parameters for the measurement. These parameters definitions are supported through Ohv.
Each of the file have a current version which is shown inside the brackets. For checking if a new
version of the definition is available the button on the right side can be used to check for a new
version. If a new version is available it can be downloaded and the OHV Suite must be restarted.

7.1.3 Simple measurement mode

The simple measurement mode is activated by pressing the Simple mode button in the A area.
For this mode, further settings are available in the lower section D . In simple measurement mode,
the measurement is performed automatically without interactions for the user.
The setting Automatic attenuation switching level is used to automatically switch the attenuation
levels of the DAC device. The attenuation is automatically increased or decreased by one step. The

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.1. DAC MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION Page 41 of 154

The tester must be able to guarantee during the complete measuring proce-
dure the safety of installation and environment. This mode does not provide
unattended operation, but serves only to facilitate the work.

B
C

Figure 7.1: Overview simple measurement configuration

Automatic attenuation switching level can be selected between 10 % and 40 %. The Attenuation
warning level specifies the threshold at which a prompt window appears asking whether the last
measurement should be repeated, the next procedure step should be carried out or the check
should be aborted. The attenuation is automatically increased or decreased by two steps. The
Attenuation warning level can be between 5 % and 25 %. Both settings are applied at the upper
and lower gain limits. In Figure 7.2 the two limits and their allowed values are shown.

Automatic attenuation switching level Attenuation warning level

Figure 7.2: Display the switching ranges in simple measurement mode

The setting Waiting time between two measurements specifies the period of time to wait between
completion of the last measurement and the next measurement.

For measurements which are using multiple devices like Double side measure-
ments are Joint measurements it is recommended to use the advanced mode to
ensure the safety of the users!

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.1. DAC MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION Page 42 of 154

7.1.4 Advanced measurement mode

The advanced measurement mode is activated by pressing the Advanced mode button in the A
area. This mode has no advanced settings during measurement. In the advanced measurement
mode, the user is responsible for the settings of the DAC device and starting the measurement.
The detailed information and settings are explained separately in the respective section.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.2. APPLY SAFETY RULES Page 43 of 154

B
C

Figure 7.3: Overview advanced measurement configuration

For measurements which are using multiple devices like Double side measure-
ments are Joint measurements it is recommended to use the advanced mode to
ensure the safety of the users!

7.2 Apply safety rules

The security rules are displayed on every successful connection to the device. This information
must be carefully read and the message window then confirmed (cf. Figure 7.4).

Figure 7.4: Safety rules

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.3. OVERVIEW Page 44 of 154

7.3 Overview
This section describes the general overview for a connected DAC device. Once a new connection
to a device has been established (How to establish a new connection is described in Chapter D)
the overview (Figure 7.5) is automatically displayed. In the upper Section A (Figure 7.5) all
information about the device are displayed. The B area displays all information to start the
DAC test measurement. Area C contains the different measurement types which are available
for the connected device. These types are defined by the device itself. The D contains the
optional information of synchronization status between different device. In Section 10 the detailed
information for the synchronization of devices are depicted in detail.

The availability for certain measure modes and high voltage levels depend
on the available hardware model of the device. Please refer to the technical
specification section for an overview of the differences.

Figure 7.5: Device overview without started measurement

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.3. OVERVIEW Page 45 of 154

7.3.1 Device information

For each device, the following information is displayed in the A area and described in Table 7.1:

Element Description

Serial number The serial number of the device can be seen at the top edge.

Device image A picture of the DAC system is displayed in the left area
of the device information.

Status LEDs The status LEDs show the current status of the device. A
colored LED indicates an activity and a gray LED means
inactive.
Ready The device is ready for use, the key switch and the
emergency stop button are activated on the safety box.
HV ON When this LED is red, the high voltage is switched
on.
Charging If this LED is green, the cable is charged with
voltage.
Error If this LED is red, an error has occurred.

Environment values Below the status LEDs, the humidity and temperature are
displayed within the DAC unit.

Program versions Below the environment values the program versions which
are currently running on the device are displayed. This is
the device software version and the FPGA version.

Available Updates If any update for the connected device is available an addi-
tionally information about the new version is shown. This
also includes a new button for performing the update. More
information about the device update are described in Sec-
tion C.2.

Table 7.1: Device information

7.3.2 DAC measurement information

The section B displays the information used for the current DAC measurement. This includes the
button Start DAC measurement, Current data folder and Current file. Depending on the selected
device, procedure and cable a warning for implausible configuration could be displayed below the
button Start DAC measurement. The possible warning are depicted in section 7.3.2. Independent
of these warning the measurement could be started, but it is possible that not all measurements
can be performed with this measurement configuration.
The button Start DAC measurement starts a new measurement. A new measurement file is auto-
matically created. The software will store all necessary information which are needed to evaluate
the measurement inside this file. The file storage location is determined through the selected
measurement directory (cf. Section 6.1), followed by the near end substation. The file name is
generated automatically and is composed as follows: CABLEID_YYYYMMDD_HHmm.tdac.
The information are replaced as follows:

CABLEID is the identification of the cable

YYYY is the current year
MM is the current month, including leading zeros

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.3. OVERVIEW Page 46 of 154

DD is the current day, including leading zeros

HH is the current hour, including leading zeros
mm is the current minute, including leading zeros

The current file name is displayed in the field Current file. The button Start DAC measurement
is renamed to Stop DAC measurement and in the C area all available measurement modes are
displayed (cf. Figure 7.6).

Figure 7.6: Device overview with started measurement

Implausible configuration warnings

Implausible configurations are detected through the combination of selected procedure, cable and
the used DAC device. There are four different misconfigurations possible. The following table
( reftable:DacImplausibleConfigurations) shows the different warning.

7.3.3 DAC Measurement Modes

Depending on the available measurement modes, buttons for each type of measurement are dis-
played in the C area. The following list contains all available measurement modes:

Overview display the device and measurement information

Calibration allows calibration of charge for the cable
TDR enables TDR calibration for the cable
DAC enables high-voltage tests on the cable
LC enables leakage current measurements on the cable
VLF enables the execution of VLF high-voltage tests on the cable
DS enables high-voltage tests on the cable for the far end

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.3. OVERVIEW Page 47 of 154

Warning Description

The procedure has at least one

step which is over the maximum
voltage of the device. Please check
the procedure and the cable for
corresponding input to the used
device.

The output voltage is below the

expected minimum cable voltage.
Please check the cable for valid in-
put.

The procedure is invalid for the

used cable. It is not recommended
to test a cable with a high factor
as 3.0 for the U0 voltage.

The procedure contains a step

which tries to set the output volt-
age below the minimum voltage of
the device.

Table 7.2: Implausible configurations

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.4. PD CALIBRATION Page 48 of 154

7.4 PD Calibration
This chapter describes the UI elements available for PD calibration. Calibration is achieved by
clicking on the Calibration button ( C in Figure 7.6).
Figure 7.7 shows the distribution of the calibration window. In the upper section A the input
fields for the supplied calibration value, used filter type and the selection of the attenuation stages
are available. The middle section B displays the results during calibration. The lower section
C contains the buttons for starting the calibration and saving.

C
Figure 7.7: PD calibration overview

The data will be filtered by the selected filter type. The following filters are currently available:
Bandpass filter with frequencies from 100 kHz up to 1 MHz
Bandpass filter with frequencies from 100 kHz up to 2 MHz
Bandpass filter with frequencies from 100 kHz up to 3 MHz
Bandpass filter with frequencies from 100 kHz up to 10 MHz
Bandpass filter with frequencies from 100 kHz up to 20 MHz

To carry out a calibration, the set value is entered by the calibrator into the Calibration Input
test field or selected directly via the check box. The Calibration button starts a calibration
measurement. As soon as the measurement is finished, the result is displayed ( B ). During
calibration, care must be taken to ensure that the signal-to-noise ratio is good. In Figure 7.8c
such a relation is represented. In Figure 7.8 there is an image with too little relative magnitude
(low signal-to-noise ratio, 7.8a) and an image with excessively high signal (signal-to-noise ratio is
good, but the signal value for the selected attenuation is too high, 7.8b). If the result is not in
the expected range, the attenuation must be increased with the help of button or decreased
with the button . Afterwards, the calibration must be carried out again and the result must
be waited for. This must be done until a good level is reached (cf. Figure 7.8c). As soon as the
calibration was successful, the calibration can be saved with the button Save. If the calibration has
been successfully stored, the time for saving is displayed before the button Save (cf. Figure 7.8c).

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.4. PD CALIBRATION Page 49 of 154

(a) PD calibration signal too low

(b) PD calibration signal too high

(c) Good PD calibration signal

Figure 7.8: Calibration saturation

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.5. TDR CALIBRATION Page 50 of 154

7.5 TDR Calibration

This chapter describes the UI elements available for a TDR calibration. TDR Calibration is
activated by clicking the TDR button ( C in Figure 7.6).
Figure 7.9 shows the available areas of the TDR calibration window. The A section is used to
enter parameters for TDR calibration and data evaluation. The B section displays the results of
the TDR calibration. C contains the control elements for TDR calibration.

Figure 7.9: TDR calibration overview

In order to perform a TDR calibration, a calibrator signal must be fed into the test object (details
about the TDR calibration can be found in Chapter 5.5.3). The button Data Acquisition starts the
TDR measurement. In contrast to the PD calibration, TDR calibration is performed permanently.
This means that when new measurement results are available, they are evaluated and displayed
and the next measurement is carried out automatically. This is done until the Data Acquisition
button is pressed again. Changes to the settings in the A area are applied directly to the next
measurement. As with the PD calibration, care must be taken to ensure that the signals are
well controlled. Figure 7.10 shows a poorly controlled TDR measurement in Figure 7.10a and
Figure 7.10b. Figure 7.10c shows a well controlled measurement.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.5. TDR CALIBRATION Page 51 of 154

(a) TDR calibration signal too low

(b) TDR calibration signal too high

(c) Good TDR calibration signal

Figure 7.10: Bad and good TDR calibration saturation

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.5. TDR CALIBRATION Page 52 of 154

7.5.1 TDR input parameter

For TDR calibration, the following parameters can be specified in the A area in Figure 7.9.
Table 7.3 contains the detailed description of the parameters.

Parameter Description

Change Attenuation Changes the sensitivity of the device. With the button
the attenuation can be increased and decreased with the
button .

Estimated length The estimated cable length must be greater than the actual
length of the cable. This length determines the number of
data recorded by the DAC device.

Current velocity The propagation velocity is used to calculate the cable

length.

Table 7.3: TDR input parameter

7.5.2 TDR result area

The result area displays the calculated values Reflection distance and Reflection delay. These are
determined from the distance between the first peak and the reflection, whereby the propagation
velocity is included in the calculation. The TDR diagram is displayed in the lower part of the
result output.

7.5.3 TDR control elements

Different buttons are available in the lower part of the TDR calibration window. The button
Data Acquisition allows to start and stop the TDR measurement. With the buttons Update cable
and New cable it is possible to update the current cable or create a new cable. In Section Cable
manipulation the details for this are explained in more detail. The Show Options button displays
additional options for TDR measurement to the left of the diagram. Details are explained in the
Section TDR options. The button Save is available for saving a TDR calibration. When saving, the
current TDR measurement is added to the selected cable and is therefore available for evaluation.

Cable manipulation
There are two possibilities for manipulating the cable. It is possible to change the propagation
velocity and length of an existing cable or to create a new cable.

Update cable When updating the propagation speed and length, clicking the Update cable
button opens a pop-up window (cf. Figure 7.11). In this window you can select the value to be
updated. The current value and the new value are displayed for each. Using the button Apply the
selected is updated inside the current cable. If the update should be aborted, the Cancel button
is available.

Create new cable To create a new cable, click the New cable button. A pop-up window opens
(cf. Figure 7.12). In this window it is possible to enter all parameters for a cable which are needed.
The individual parameters are described in Chapter 6.3.3. After entering all parameters, the cable
can be create via the Create New button.

TDR options
The TDR measurement has different options to improve the measurement. In Figure 7.13 the
options are shown and are briefly described in Table 7.4.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.5. TDR CALIBRATION Page 53 of 154

Figure 7.11: Update current cable

Figure 7.12: Create new cable

Figure 7.13: TDR options

Option Description

Average Depth Specifies the number of measurements over which an aver-

age value is calculated and then the evaluation is carried
out.

Trigger level Specifies the threshold in %, which must be exceeded for

the first peak.

Reflection level Specifies the threshold in % that must be exceeded for re-
flection.

Manual Reflection Selection If this is active, a moveable line is displayed in the diagram,
which determines the value for the length calculation man-
ually.

Invert Signal If this is active, the signal is inverted (multiplied with -1).

Table 7.4: TDR options

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.6. DAC MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 54 of 154

7.6 DAC Measurement (Simple mode)

This chapter describes the UI elements that are available for a DAC measurement in Simple mode.
Figure 7.14 shows the general structure of the measurement surface if now high voltage is switched
on. In this case the B area displays the information for switching on the high voltage before a
test could be started. After switching on the high voltage the user interface changes the B area
like shown in Figure 7.15. The area B contains now three part which are available during the
measurement. Now the B area contains buttons available for performing the test and showing the
current status for high voltage. C is used to display current data and the advanced options. In
the area D the current progress and the status of the measurement is displayed. On the bottom
of the window the synchronization view (see Chapter 10) is available if the devices supports the
synchronization.

Figure 7.14: DAC measurement overview high voltage off (simple mode)

B C
D

Figure 7.15: DAC measurement overview high voltage on (simple mode)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.6. DAC MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 55 of 154

7.6.1 UI elements for simple mode

The following three sections describe the individual UI elements in detail. In Section 7.6.2 only
these elements are referred to afterwards.

Result view elements

A in Figure 7.15 displays the measurement results of the last shot. The following elements (cf.
Table 7.5) are available:

Element Description

Diagram Displays the last shot data.

Saturation Shows the level of the last shot. Depending on

this level, the attenuation may have to be ad-
justed.

Measurement overview Displays the calculated results of the last shot.

Test procedure overview Shows the test procedure for the current mea-
surement. The individual shots are highlighted
in color to indicate whether they have already
been completed, are in execution or have yet to
be executed. The voltage ratio U/U0 for each
single shot is displayed and at the same time the
calculated charge.

Table 7.5: Result view elements

Navigation elements
B in Figure 7.15 shows elements that are needed to perform a DAC measurement. Table 7.6
describes the elements.

Element Description

Begin/Finish Test This button can be used to start or end a test.

LED’s Online The device is ready for use, the key switch and the
emergency stop button are activated on the safety box.
HV ON When this LED is red, the high voltage is switched
on.

Pause The automatic execution of the procedure can be inter-

rupted and continued again.

Abort Allows to abort a current running single measurement.

Table 7.6: DAC measurement elements

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.6. DAC MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 56 of 154

Elements for the current values

C in Figure 7.15 contains element for setting the device and displays measurement values. Ta-
ble 7.7 describes the elements.

Element Description

Current voltage Displays the current voltage value, which is approached at

the next triggering of a shot.

Next voltage Displays the next voltage value which is used for the next
procedure step.

Advanced This button can be used to show or hide additional informa-

tion. The additional elements includes attenuation change
elements, the measurement time for the current test and it
is possible to specify a comment for the test via the button
(see section 7.12.1 for detailed information).

Table 7.7: Current DAC measurement value elements

Status information elements

D in Figure 7.15 depicted the status elements for the simple measurement mode. The upper line
contains the information in which step the software is currently perform. The lower progress bar
depicted the current progress of the procedure.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.6. DAC MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 57 of 154

7.6.2 Perform a DAC measurement in simple mode

A DAC measurement in simple mode is almost completely automatic. The user has little interac-
tion to perform, but is responsible for ensuring security. In this mode, the specified test procedure is
performed. The next steps are automatically taken and the amplifier stages are switched according
to the set parameters (cf. Section 7.1.3).
For starting a test, the high voltage on the safety box must first be switched on. When starting a
test, a warning message (cf. Figure 7.16) indicates that the calibrator must be removed.

Before a high-voltage measurement can be carried out, the calibrator must be

removed! The calibrator will be damaged if it is not removed before the high
voltage test.

Figure 7.16: Calibrator removal warning

If the cable to be tested is a multi-conductor cable, the phase of the cable to be measured is still
queried (cf. Figure 7.17). If the phase has been selected or a single-core cable is involved, the first
shot of the procedure is immediately started.

Figure 7.17: Phase selection

After each shot, the measurement results for this shot are displayed. On the basis of these mea-
surement results, the software decides whether the gain of the device must be changed. If this is
the case, this is done automatically. If the level is too high, a warning message is displayed on how
to proceed with the further measurement. The possibilities are described in Table 7.8:

Element Description

Repeat measurement The last shot is repeated with a lower amplification.

Continue with test The test continues with lower amplification. The next step
is automatically taken.

Abort The test is aborted.

Table 7.8: Possibilities for continuing the DAC measurement

After each shot the time is counted down until the next shot can be taken (cf. Figure 7.18). This
time can be set in the Simple Mode measurement settings (cf. Section 7.1.3). In the test procedure
overview you can see the currently measured charge value for the individual shots. All completed
shots are displayed as green bars. The orange bar marks the next step in the procedure. All blue
bars represent the steps that still need to be performed.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.6. DAC MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 58 of 154

Figure 7.18: Waiting for next measurement

After the last shot of the procedure has been done, the test is automatically terminated if it
is a single-core cable. If the cable consists of several conductors, the user is asked whether the
measurement should be performed with the next phase (cf. Figure 7.19), or whether the test
should be terminated.

Figure 7.19: Continue with next phase

If the measurement is to be continued with the next phase, the message appears that the high
voltage is to be switched off, the grounding stick is used for earthing and then the next phase can
be connected (cf. Figure 7.20).

Figure 7.20: Grounding and connecting new phase warning

After the next phase for the measurement has been connected, the software waits for the measure-
ment to continue (cf. Figure 7.21). Press the button Go on with Test to start the measurement.
When starting the measurement for the new phase, you still have to select which phase is to be
used for the measurement. As at the beginning of the measurement, a message box appears which
phase should be measured next. In Figure 7.22 you can see that the first phase has already been

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.6. DAC MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 59 of 154

measured and only the two other phases are available. After selecting the corresponding phase, the
cycle starts over the procedure again and the measurements are carried out for the corresponding
phase.

Figure 7.21: Wait for continue the measurement

Figure 7.22: Select next phase

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.7. DAC MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 60 of 154

7.7 DAC Measurement (Advanced mode)

This chapter describes the UI elements which are available for a DAC measurement in Advanced
mode. Figure 7.23 shows the general structure of the measurement surface. A displays the
measurement results after each high-voltage shot. The B section contains buttons that can
be used to navigate within a procedure, as well as buttons to perform a test or trigger a shot.
C displays current data and selects measurement settings. On the bottom of the window the
synchronization view (see Chapter 10) is available if the devices supports the synchronization.

B C

Figure 7.23: DAC measurement overview

7.7.1 UI elements
The following three sections describe the individual UI elements in detail. In Section 7.7.2 only
these elements are referenced afterwards.

Result view elements

A in Figure 7.23 displays the measurement results of the last shot. The following elements (cf.
Table 7.9) are available:

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.7. DAC MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 61 of 154

Element Description

Diagram Displays the last shot data.

Saturation Shows the level of the last shot. Depending on

this level, the attenuation may have to be ad-
justed.

Measurement overview Displays the calculated results of the last shot.

Test procedure overview Displays an overview of the completed measure-

ments of the test. The voltage ratio U/U0 for
each individual shot is displayed and the calcu-
lated charge.

Table 7.9: Result view elements

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.7. DAC MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 62 of 154

Navigation elements
B in Figure 7.23 shows elements that are needed to perform a DAC measurement. Table 7.10
describes the elements.

Element Description

LED’s Online The device is ready for use, the key switch and the
emergency stop button are activated on the safety box.
HV ON When this LED is red, the high voltage is switched
on.
Wait for finish This LED is green as long as a high-voltage
measurement is performed (charging the cable and retriev-
ing data).

Begin/Finish Test This button can be used to start or end a test.

Measure Triggers a new high-voltage shot.

Abort Allows to abort a current running single measurement.

Select previous step Goes to the previous step in the procedure. Next to the
button the voltage is displayed, which would correspond
to the one before. Once the first step is reached n.a. is
displayed.

Select next step Goes to the next step in the procedure. Next to the button
the voltage is displayed, which would correspond to the
next one. Once the last step has been reached n.a. is
displayed.

Comment Allows adding comments to the test (cf. Section 7.12.1 for
detailed information).

Table 7.10: DAC measurement elements

Elements for the current values

C in Figure 7.23 contains element for setting the device and displays measurement values. Ta-
ble 7.11 describes the elements.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.7. DAC MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 63 of 154

Element Description

Current step target voltage Displays the current voltage value, which is ap-
proached at the next triggering of a shot.

Insert new Voltage Allows you to add a manual step for the next shot
(cf. Section 7.12.2 for detailed information).

Test duration Displays the time since the start of the test.

Measurement duration Displays the duration from triggering a shot to

evaluation.

Available cores Contains a list of cores stored in the cable. This

makes it possible to assign the individual shots to
the selected phase.

Change Attenuation Allows you to adjust the attenuation. The but-

tons and increase or decrease the attenua-
tion.

Table 7.11: Current DAC measurement value elements

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.7. DAC MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 64 of 154

7.7.2 Perform a DAC measurement in advanced mode

In order to carry out a DAC measurement, the high voltage must first be switched on at the safety
box. Furthermore, it is necessary to start a new test. A test is necessary so that the individual
shots can be assigned to this test. When starting a test, a warning message (cf. Figure 7.16) is
displayed that the calibrator must be removed. After confirming the warning, the button Begin
test will be renamed Finish test. Now it is possible to start with the measurement. For this the
first shot can be released by pressing the button Measure. This means that the cable is charged
up to the specified voltage and the measurement is then recorded. In the area A (Figure 7.23)
the measured values and the diagram are hidden (Figure 7.24) until the new measured values are
available.

Before a high-voltage measurement can be carried out, the calibrator must be

removed! The calibrator will be damaged if it is not removed before the high
voltage test.

Figure 7.24: Disabled result view during running measurement

After the shot has been carried out and the measurement results are displayed, it is necessary to
check whether the measurement settings need to be changed.

In order to ensure good reflection detection, it is necessary that the level of

the charge can be clearly recognized. For this purpose, the attenuation can be
increased or decreased with the buttons and . However, the control of
the charge level must not reach or exceed the 100% mark, as the DAC system
would be overloaded and signals are cut off!

If it should be necessary to change the attenuation, the current shot can be restarted after the
change by means of the button Measure. Otherwise, you can go to the next step of the procedure
and perform the next measurement. This procedure is carried out until the end of the test process.
A test can be completed using the Finish Test button (cf. Figure 7.25).

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.7. DAC MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 65 of 154

Figure 7.25: Finished test

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.8. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 66 of 154

7.8 Double side Measurement (Simple mode)

This chapter describes the UI elements that are available for a Double side measurement in Simple
mode. Figure 7.26 shows the general structure of the measurement surface if now high voltage is
switched on. In this case the B area displays the information for switching on the high voltage
before a test could be started. After switching on the high voltage the user interface changes
the B area like shown in Figure 7.27. The area B contains now three part which are available
during the measurement. Now the B area contains buttons available for performing the test and
showing the current status for high voltage. C is used to display current data and the advanced
options. In the area D the current progress and the status of the measurement is displayed. On
the bottom of the window the synchronization view (see Chapter 10) is available if the devices
supports the synchronization.

Figure 7.26: Double side measurement overview high voltage off (simple mode)

B C
D

Figure 7.27: Double side measurement overview high voltage on (simple mode)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.8. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 67 of 154

7.8.1 UI elements for simple mode

The following three sections describe the individual UI elements in detail. In Section 7.8.2 only
these elements are referred to afterwards.

Result view elements

A in Figure 7.27 displays the measurement results of the last shot. The following elements (cf.
Table 7.12) are available:

Element Description

Diagram Displays the last shot data.

Saturation Shows the level of the last shot. Depending on

this level, the attenuation may have to be ad-
justed.

Measurement overview Displays the calculated results of the last shot.

Test procedure overview Shows the test procedure for the current mea-
surement. The individual shots are highlighted
in color to indicate whether they have already
been completed, are in execution or have yet to
be executed. The voltage ratio U/U0 for each
single shot is displayed and at the same time the
calculated charge.

Table 7.12: Result view elements

Navigation elements
B in Figure 7.27 shows elements that are needed to perform a Double side measurement. Ta-
ble 7.13 describes the elements.

Element Description

Begin/Finish Test This button can be used to start or end a test.

LED’s Online The device is ready for use, the key switch and the
emergency stop button are activated on the safety box.
HV ON When this LED is red, the high voltage is switched
on.

Pause The automatic execution of the procedure can be inter-

rupted and continued again.

Abort Allows to abort a current running single measurement.

Table 7.13: Double side measurement elements

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.8. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 68 of 154

Elements for the current values

C in Figure 7.27 contains element for setting the device and displays measurement values. Ta-
ble 7.14 describes the elements.

Element Description

Current voltage Displays the current voltage value, which is approached at

the next triggering of a shot.

Next voltage Displays the next voltage value which is used for the next
procedure step.

Advanced This button can be used to show or hide additional informa-

tion. The additional elements includes attenuation change
elements, the measurement time for the current test and it
is possible to specify a comment for the test via the button
(see section 7.12.1 for detailed information).

Table 7.14: Current Double side measurement value elements

Status information elements

D in Figure 7.27 depicted the status elements for the simple measurement mode. The upper line
contains the information in which step the software is currently perform. The lower progress bar
depicted the current progress of the procedure.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.8. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 69 of 154

7.8.2 Perform a Double side measurement in simple mode

A Double side measurement in simple mode is almost completely automatic. The user has little
interaction to perform, but is responsible for ensuring security. In this mode, the specified test
procedure is performed. The next steps are automatically taken and the amplifier stages are
switched according to the set parameters (cf. Section 7.1.3).

For a double side measurement each zero kV shot will be automatically skipped!

For starting a test, the high voltage on the safety box must first be switched on. When starting a
test, a warning message (cf. Figure 7.28) indicates that the calibrator must be removed.

Before a high-voltage measurement can be carried out, the calibrator must be

removed! The calibrator will be damaged if it is not removed before the high
voltage test.

Figure 7.28: Calibrator removal warning

If the cable to be tested is a multi-conductor cable, the phase of the cable to be measured is still
queried (cf. Figure 7.29). If the phase has been selected or a single-core cable is involved, the first
shot of the procedure is immediately started.

Figure 7.29: Phase selection

After each shot, the measurement results for this shot are displayed. On the basis of these mea-
surement results, the software decides whether the gain of the device must be changed. If this is
the case, this is done automatically. If the level is too high, a warning message is displayed on how
to proceed with the further measurement. The possibilities are described in Table 7.15:

Element Description

Repeat measurement The last shot is repeated with a lower amplification.

Continue with test The test continues with lower amplification. The next step
is automatically taken.

Abort The test is aborted.

Table 7.15: Possibilities for continuing the Double side measurement

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.8. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 70 of 154

After each shot the time is counted down until the next shot can be taken (cf. Figure 7.30). This
time can be set in the Simple Mode measurement settings (cf. Section 7.1.3). In the test procedure
overview you can see the currently measured charge value for the individual shots. All completed
shots are displayed as green bars. The orange bar marks the next step in the procedure. All blue
bars represent the steps that still need to be performed.

Figure 7.30: Waiting for next measurement

After the last shot of the procedure has been done, the test is automatically terminated if it
is a single-core cable. If the cable consists of several conductors, the user is asked whether the
measurement should be performed with the next phase (cf. Figure 7.31), or whether the test
should be terminated.

Figure 7.31: Continue with next phase

If the measurement is to be continued with the next phase, the message appears that the high
voltage is to be switched off, the grounding stick is used for earthing and then the next phase can
be connected (cf. Figure 7.32).

Figure 7.32: Grounding and connecting new phase warning

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.8. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (SIMPLE MODE) Page 71 of 154

After the next phase for the measurement has been connected, the software waits for the measure-
ment to continue (cf. Figure 7.33). Press the button Go on with Test to start the measurement.
When starting the measurement for the new phase, you still have to select which phase is to be
used for the measurement. As at the beginning of the measurement, a message box appears which
phase should be measured next. In Figure 7.34 you can see that the first phase has already been
measured and only the two other phases are available. After selecting the corresponding phase, the
cycle starts over the procedure again and the measurements are carried out for the corresponding
phase.

Figure 7.33: Wait for continue the measurement

Figure 7.34: Select next phase

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.9. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 72 of 154

7.9 Double side Measurement (Advanced mode)

This chapter describes the UI elements which are available for a Double side measurement in
Advanced mode. Figure 7.35 shows the general structure of the measurement surface. A displays
the measurement results after each high-voltage shot. The B section contains buttons that can
be used to navigate within a procedure, as well as buttons to perform a test or trigger a shot.
C displays current data and selects measurement settings. On the bottom of the window the
synchronization view (see Chapter 10) is available if the devices supports the synchronization.

B C

Figure 7.35: Double side measurement overview

7.9.1 UI elements
The following three sections describe the individual UI elements in detail. In Section 7.7.2 only
these elements are referenced afterwards.

Result view elements

A in Figure 7.35 displays the measurement results of the last shot. The following elements (cf.
Table 7.16) are available:

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.9. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 73 of 154

Element Description

Diagram Displays the last shot data.

Saturation Shows the level of the last shot. Depending on

this level, the attenuation may have to be ad-
justed.

Measurement overview Displays the calculated results of the last shot.

Test procedure overview Displays an overview of the completed measure-

ments of the test. The voltage ratio U/U0 for
each individual shot is displayed and the calcu-
lated charge.

Table 7.16: Result view elements

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.9. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 74 of 154

Navigation elements
B in Figure 7.35 shows elements that are needed to perform a double side measurement. Ta-
ble 7.17 describes the elements.

Element Description

LED’s Online The device is ready for use, the key switch and the
emergency stop button are activated on the safety box.
HV ON When this LED is red, the high voltage is switched
on.
Wait for finish This LED is green as long as a high-voltage
measurement is performed (charging the cable and retriev-
ing data).

Begin/Finish Test This button can be used to start or end a test.

Measure Triggers a new high-voltage shot.

Abort Allows to abort a current running single measurement.

Select previous step Goes to the previous step in the procedure. Next to the
button the voltage is displayed, which would correspond
to the one before. Once the first step is reached n.a. is
displayed.

Select next step Goes to the next step in the procedure. Next to the button
the voltage is displayed, which would correspond to the
next one. Once the last step has been reached n.a. is
displayed.

Comment Allows adding comments to the test (cf. Section 7.12.1 for
detailed information).

Table 7.17: Double side measurement elements

Elements for the current values

C in Figure 7.35 contains element for setting the device and displays measurement values. Ta-
ble 7.18 describes the elements.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.9. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 75 of 154

Element Description

Current step target voltage Displays the current voltage value, which is ap-
proached at the next triggering of a shot.

Insert new Voltage Allows you to add a manual step for the next shot
(cf. Section 7.12.2 for detailed information).

Test duration Displays the time since the start of the test.

Measurement duration Displays the duration from triggering a shot to

evaluation.

Available cores Contains a list of cores stored in the cable. This

makes it possible to assign the individual shots to
the selected phase.

Change Attenuation Allows you to adjust the attenuation. The but-

tons and increase or decrease the attenua-
tion.

Table 7.18: Current Double side measurement value elements

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.9. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 76 of 154

7.9.2 Perform a Double side measurement in advanced mode

In order to carry out a Double side measurement, the high voltage must first be switched on
at the safety box. Furthermore, it is necessary to start a new test. A test is necessary so that
the individual shots can be assigned to this test. When starting a test, a warning message (cf.
Figure 7.28) is displayed that the calibrator must be removed. After confirming the warning, the
button Begin test will be renamed Finish test. Now it is possible to start with the measurement.

For a double side measurement each zero kV shot will be automatically skipped!

For this the first shot can be released by pressing the button Measure. This means that the
cable is charged up to the specified voltage and the measurement is then recorded. In the area
A (Figure 7.35) the measured values and the diagram are hidden (Figure 7.36) until the new
measured values are available.

Before a high-voltage measurement can be carried out, the calibrator must be

removed! The calibrator will be damaged if it is not removed before the high
voltage test.

Figure 7.36: Disabled result view during running measurement

After the shot has been carried out and the measurement results are displayed, it is necessary to
check whether the measurement settings need to be changed.

In order to ensure good reflection detection, it is necessary that the level of

the charge can be clearly recognized. For this purpose, the attenuation can be
increased or decreased with the buttons and . However, the control of
the charge level must not reach or exceed the 100% mark, as the DAC system
would be overloaded and signals are cut off!

If it should be necessary to change the attenuation, the current shot can be restarted after the
change by means of the button Measure. Otherwise, you can go to the next step of the procedure
and perform the next measurement. This procedure is carried out until the end of the test process.
A test can be completed using the Finish Test button (cf. Figure 7.37).

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.9. DOUBLE SIDE MEASUREMENT (ADVANCED MODE) Page 77 of 154

Figure 7.37: Finished test

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.10. VLF MEASUREMENT Page 78 of 154

7.10 VLF measurement

This chapter describes the UI elements that are available for a VLF measurement. Figure 7.38
shows the general structure of the measurement surface. A represents the time course of the
measurement. The B area is used to display the current measurement results for the last mea-
surement and the complete test procedure during the test. The C area contains buttons that can
be used to navigate within a procedure and the button to start the test. The currently selected
settings are displayed in the D area.

A B

C D

Figure 7.38: VLF measurement overview

7.10.1 UI elements
The following four sections describe the individual UI elements in detail. In section 7.10.2 only
these elements are referenced afterwards.

VLF measurement overview

For the display of the VLF measurement, in the area A in Figure 7.38 the time course of the VLF
measurement is displayed. The upper diagram shows the complete process and the lower diagram
shows the more detailed process. The data for the complete process are updated all 30 s with a
new voltage value. The added voltage value is the maximum of the test since the last addition
to the diagram. The detailed process diagram contains a new voltage value for all 500 ms, which
corresponds to the current voltage value of the measurement. The maximum display time for this
diagram is 1 min. The saturation of the last VLF shot is displayed to the left of the diagrams. The
attenuation level can be adjusted with the aid of this saturation level.

Measurement results
B in Figure 7.38 displays the current measurement results of the last shot, as well as the test
procedure for the VLF measurement. The current results are displayed in the upper area. The
lower area contains an overview of the VLF measurements performed. For each measurement, the
used voltage value and the maximum charge are displayed in a diagram.

VLF navigation elements

C in Figure 7.38 shows elements (cf. Table 7.19) that are needed to perform a VLF measurement.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.10. VLF MEASUREMENT Page 79 of 154

Element Description

LED’s Online The device is ready for use, the key switch and the
emergency stop button are activated on the safety box.
HV ON When this LED is red, the high voltage is switched
on.
Wait for finish This LED is green as long as measurement
data is available.

Begin/Finish Test This button can be used to start or end a test.

Select previous step Go to the previous step in the procedure. Behind the but-
ton the voltage is displayed, which would correspond to the
one before. Once the first step is reached n.a. is displayed.

Select next step Go to the next step in the procedure. Behind the button
the voltage is displayed, which would correspond to the
next one. Once the last step has been reached n.a. is
displayed.

Comment Allows adding comments to the test (cf. Section 7.12.1 for
detailed information).

Table 7.19: VLF Measurement overview elements I

Elements for the current values

D in Figure 7.38 displays the current values of the VLF measurement. In Table 7.20 the different
elements will be described.

Element Description

Current step target voltage Displays the current voltage value, which is approached at
the next triggering of a shot.

Insert new Voltage Allows you to add a manual step for the next shot (cf.
Section 7.12.2 for detailed information).

Test duration Displays the time since the start of the test.

Measurement duration Displays the measurement duration at the current voltage

level. This time is reset when switching to a new voltage
level.

Available cores Contains a list of cores stored in the cable. This makes it
possible to assign the individual shots to the selected phase.

Change Attenuation Allows you to adjust the attenuation. The buttons and
increase or decrease the attenuation.

Table 7.20: VLF Measurement overview elements II

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.10. VLF MEASUREMENT Page 80 of 154

7.10.2 Perform a VLF measurement

In order to carry out a VLF measurement, the high voltage must first be switched on at the safety
box. Furthermore, it is necessary to start a new test. A test is necessary so that the individual
shots can be assigned to this test during the test. When starting a test, a warning message (cf.
Figure 7.16) is displayed that the calibrator must be removed.

Before a high-voltage measurement can be carried out, the calibrator must be

removed! The calibrator will be damaged if it is not removed before the high
voltage test.

After confirming the warning, the button Begin Test is renamed to End Test and the VLF mea-
surement is started automatically. With VLF measurements, a measurement is carried out for
each oscillation process and the data is evaluated. After evaluation, the measurement results are
displayed. The saturation level should be observed during the VLF measurement and, if necessary,
the attenuation level should be adjusted. As soon as the measurement time at the desired voltage
level is reached, the buttons Select previous step or Select previous step can be used to switch into
the new voltage level. This is done until the desired VLF test can be completed. When this has
been achieved, the test can be completed with the help of the button End Test (see Figure 7.39).

Figure 7.39: VLF measurement finished

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.11. LEAKAGE CURRENT MEASUREMENT (LC MEASUREMENT) Page 81 of 154

7.11 Leakage current measurement (LC measurement)

This chapter describes the surface elements that are available for a leakage current measurement
(LC). Figure 7.40 shows the general structure of the measurement surface. A shows the complete
course of the LC measurement. In the area B the more detailed course for the leakage current
is displayed. The C area contains buttons that can be used to navigate within a procedure and
the button to start the test. D is used to display current data.

C D

Figure 7.40: Leakage current measurement overview

7.11.1 UI elements
The following four sections describe the individual UI elements in detail. In section 7.11.2 only
these elements are referenced afterwards.

Complete overview of the leakage current measurement

A in Figure 7.40 shows the complete course of the leakage current during the test in a diagram.
Thus all 30 s a new value is added. The added leakage current value is the maximum of the leakage
current since the last addition.

Detailed overview of the leakage current measurement

B in Figure 7.40 shows the more detailed curve of the leakage current in a diagram. Thus all
500 ms a new value is added. The added value is the current leakage current at that time. The
maximum display time for this diagram is 1 min.

Navigation elements
C in Figure 7.40 shows elements (cf. Table 7.21) that are needed to perform a leakage current
measurement.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.11. LEAKAGE CURRENT MEASUREMENT (LC MEASUREMENT) Page 82 of 154

Element Description

LED’s Online The device is ready for use, the key switch and the
emergency stop button are activated on the safety box.
HV ON When this LED is red, the high voltage is switched
on.
Wait for finish This LED is green as long as measurement
data is available.

Begin/Finish Test This button can be used to start or end a test.

Select previous step Go to the previous step in the procedure. Behind the but-
ton the voltage is displayed, which would correspond to the
one before. Once the first step is reached n.a. is displayed.

Select next step Go to the next step in the procedure. Behind the button
the voltage is displayed, which would correspond to the
next one. Once the last step has been reached n.a. is
displayed.

Comment Allows adding comments to the test (cf. Section 7.12.1 for
detailed information).

Table 7.21: LC Measurement overview elements I

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.11. LEAKAGE CURRENT MEASUREMENT (LC MEASUREMENT) Page 83 of 154

Current value elements

D in Figure 7.40 displays the current values for the leakage current measurement.

Element Description

Current step target voltage Displays the current voltage value, which is approached at
the next triggering of a shot.

Insert new Voltage Allows you to add a manual step for the next shot (cf.
Section 7.12.2 for detailed information).

Test duration Displays the time since the start of the test.

Measurement duration Displays the measurement duration at the current voltage

level. This time is reset when switching to a new voltage
level.

Available cores Contains a list of cores stored in the cable. This makes it
possible to assign the individual shots to the selected phase.

Table 7.22: LC Measurement overview elements II

7.11.2 Performing a LC measurement

For a leakage current measurement to be carried out, the high voltage on the safety box must be
switched on first. Furthermore, it is necessary to start a new test. When starting a test, a warning
message (see Figure 7.16) indicates that the calibrator must be removed.

Before a high-voltage measurement can be carried out, the calibrator must be

removed! The calibrator will be damaged if it is not removed before the high
voltage test.

After confirming the warning, the button Begin Test is renamed to End Test and the measurement
is started automatically. As soon as the measurement time at the desired voltage level is reached,
the buttons Select previous step or Select previous step can be used to set a new voltage level. This
is done until the test can be completed with the help of the button End Test (see Figure 7.41).

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.11. LEAKAGE CURRENT MEASUREMENT (LC MEASUREMENT) Page 84 of 154

Figure 7.41: LC measurement finished

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.12. CONTROL ELEMENTS INSIDE DIFFERENT MEASURE MODES Page 85 of 154

7.12 Control elements inside different measure modes

This section contains information about UI elements contained in the different measurement modes.

7.12.1 Add a comment

It is possible to add comments to a test. As long as a test has not been completed, the comment
can be added, extended or deleted. For this purpose, there is the symbol to the right of the
Finish Test button. Clicking this icon opens a pop-up window (cf. Figure 7.42) where the comment
can be entered. After the comment has been entered, you can use the Save button to add it to
the test.

Figure 7.42: Add a comment to the test

7.12.2 Add new voltage level

During a test, it may be necessary to deviate from the currently selected procedure and add new
steps. This can be done by clicking on the icon to the right of the current target voltage. This
opens a pop-up window (cf. Figure 7.43) with which it is possible to enter a new target voltage
for the next shot.

Adding a new target voltage does not change the stored procedure, which was
created in the catalog (cf. Section 6.3.6)!

Figure 7.43: Add new high voltage shot

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

8
DAC analysis

This chapter describes the interface elements that are available for evaluating existing measure-
ments and creating reports with the results. The Section 8.1 describes the different settings for the
analysis. In Section 8.2 the selection of a test is explained and in which way the test can be open.
The different UI elements which are available for analyzing a test are depicted in Section 8.3. The
Sections 8.4 and 8.5 describe extended analysis options for importing old tests or providing and
displaying tests for a double side analysis.

8.1 Analysis Configuration

This section describes the different configuration settings for analyzing tests. Two different modes
are available: Simple mode and Advanced mode. In Figure 8.1 the Simple Analysis mode is shown.
In area A you can switch between the different modes using the Simple Mode and Advanced Mode
buttons. The following sections describe the individual UI elements for the selected modes.

Figure 8.1: Analysis Configuration (Simple Mode)

8.1.1 General Settings

The general analysis settings (see B in Figure 8.1) are used for all existing analyses. The check box
Voltage axis autorange activates the automatic axis scaling of the voltage axis for each selected
analysis. If this option is not active, the voltage axis is displayed with a fixed scaling. This
maximum scaling depends on the DAC device used for the test.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.1. ANALYSIS CONFIGURATION Page 87 of 154

8.1.2 Reporting Settings

The reporting settings (see C in Figure 8.1) are used to enable or disable the custom report
template support for word reporting. If this option is enabled it is possible to select a folder where
to find the custom report templates. How to define a custom word template are detailed described
in chapter 9.

8.1.3 Simple Mode

The simple analysis mode has no further settings. All additional UI elements that were activated
in extended mode are hidden in simple mode.

8.1.4 Advanced Mode

The advanced analysis mode provides additional settings for the analysis. In Figure 8.2 ( D ) you
can see the options for this mode. In addition to the setting options shown here, further elements
are displayed in the analysis views. These are explained separately in the sections where they are
displayed.

The check box Double Side Analysis enables an additional sub-application with the name Double
Side which is displayed in the analysis application (left area of the application). The surface avail-
able for this application is explained in more detail in Section 8.5.

The Data Import Support check box activates another sub-application which allows you to import
tests from the old measurement software and perform an analysis with the latest software version.
The UI element and how it works is described in section 8.4.

Under the advanced settings you can chose a noise reduction wavelet filtering. This setting will
be used for the detection of the reflections during the analysis. Changes to this parameter will
be applied when a new reflection detection is performed. Disabling the noise reduction will use
the raw data to detect the reflections. Otherwise the selected filter order is used for the reflection
detection. The filtering is also applied to the measurements when a new shot is selected. The
reflection detection will take longer when a higher filter order is selected.

Additionally the order of reflection data processing can be chosen from the combo box right next to
Select sorting order of reflection. Choosing Sort by shot index will order the detected reflections by
the index of the shot by which they were detected. When selected Sort by location, the reflections
will be sorted by the distance at which they were detected.

The analysis of the data are using default parameters to detect the reflections. For updating these
parameters the button can be used. This will check if a new version is available and will be
automatically download the new version. After restarting the application the new parameters can
be used for the analysis.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.1. ANALYSIS CONFIGURATION Page 88 of 154

Figure 8.2: Analysis Configuration (Advanced Mode)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.2. OPEN FILE Page 89 of 154

8.2 Open file

After a test is finished, the measurements are saved in the database. In order to inspect a previously
recorded test, a test must be selected within Open file. In Figure 8.3 the initial window of the test
browser is displayed.

Figure 8.3: DAC analysis open file

8.2.1 Select a test to analyze

This section describes how a test can be selected for the analyzation. Figure 8.4 shows the steps
which are required for selecting a test. The left area ( A ) contains a browser window which displays
all available files and folders which can be selected. On the top of this area the button Parent folder
allows to change in the higher folder level. The button Switch to default data folder goes to the
default data folder which is selected inside the DAC catalog configuration (cf. Section 6.1). The
button goes to the home directory and button changes the folder to the desktop. For opening
a folder a single left mouse click is used. Selecting a single measurement file will show the detailed
information on the right upper side ( B ). The list in B contains all found measurements which
are stored inside the file. Each of the measurement is shown with the type of the measurement,
the date when the measurement was performed and the number of shot which were done during
the measurement. The next step is to select a measurement of the list. This will provide more
detailed information of the measurement in C . Additionally the button Open this file for analysis
is show, which can be used to start the analysis of the selected measurement. When this button
is click the analysis is started and selected analysis is automatically shown. The next sections
describes the detailed analysis views.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.2. OPEN FILE Page 90 of 154

Figure 8.4: Select a test to analyze

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 91 of 154

8.3 Result Overview after Test

Selecting the open analysis displays an overview of the results. Detailed data views can be viewed
in several diagrams. The following table shows an overview of the available possibilities of display
according to the type of check.

Overview (DAC)

Overview (VLF)

Measurements (DAC)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 92 of 154

Measurements (VLF)

TDR Calibrations

Pattern (DAC)

Pattern (VLF)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 93 of 154

Pulses (DAC)

Pulses (VLF)

VLF

Reflections

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 94 of 154

Details (DAC)

Report (Word)

Report (CSV)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 95 of 154

8.3.1 Overview
The analysis overview (cf. Figure 8.5) displays the general information of the selected test. In
Figure 8.6 the analysis interface for a VLF test is displayed. The analysis surface for all testing
types is divided into two parts. On the left side ( A ) the buttons to select the individual analysis
surfaces are available. The phase of the cable can be selected on the top of the right side in a
selection list. The cable determines the number of possible choices. If it is a multi-conductor
cable, the individual phases L1 to L3, as well as the selection for all phases (All) are available.
The respective phase selection directly influences the display of the individual analysis views. The
cable phase selection is included in each individual analysis interface. The section B displays the
correspondingly selected analysis view and is toggled by clicking the buttons from A .

B
A

Figure 8.5: Analysis Overview (DAC test)

A B

Figure 8.6: Analysis Overview (VLF test)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 96 of 154

8.3.2 Measurements
The individual shots ( A cf. Figure 8.7) can be selected in the measurement overview. In the
right pane ( B ) the measurement data of the selected shot are displayed. The lower range of B
represents the calculated values as well as the used attenuation of the selected shot.

A B

Figure 8.7: DAC Measurement

For a VLF measurement, the area of the A and the lower area of B are identical and contain
the same information. The display of the selected shot is displayed at the top of B , but only the
overturning process of the VLF measurement is displayed (cf. Figure 8.8).

A B

Figure 8.8: VLF Measurement

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 97 of 154

8.3.3 Data Filtering

Data filtering is provided for shot data viewing. This function is available at following overviews:
Measurements, Pattern, Pulses and Reflections. Filtering function could be enabled or disabled by
ticking the checkbox “Enable Filter”. Filtering option could be accessed by clicking button “Filter
Options”. Currently filtering is only based on “Voltage” and following five filtering criteria are
available:

⋆ above Only those data which are greater than the specific value are selected
⋆ below Only those data which are less than the specific value are selected
⋆ atleast Only those data which are greater or equal than the specific value are selected
⋆ atmost Only those data which are less or equal than the specific value are selected
⋆ between Only those data which are less or equal than the minimum specification and greater or
equal than the maximum specification are selected

The specific value namely minimum and maximum specification could be selected from the check-
box of value specification. Those value options would be updated automatically after every test
execution. Filter options are updated only when button “Apply” in the filter option window is
clicked. Both value specifications are only available under “between” mode. When filtering is
enabled, current filtering criterion could also be displayed between filter buttons and shot data list
(cf. Figure 8.9).

Figure 8.9: Data Filtering

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 98 of 154

8.3.4 TDR Calibrations

The TDR Calibration window displays all stored TDR calibration A (cf. Figure 8.10) for the
cable that was stored during the test procedure for the cable. For a selected TDR calibration, all
relevant information is displayed in the B area. The upper part of the B displays the propagation
speed, length of the cable, the used gain and the relative magnitude during calibration. The lower
area provides the TDR data in a diagram.

A B

Figure 8.10: TDR Calibrations

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 99 of 154

8.3.5 Pattern
The pattern overview (cf. Figure 8.11) contains the data of all selected shots ( A ) as phase
resolved PD events. In the B area, the overflow diagram is displayed where all PD events outside
the maximum pattern scaling are sorted. Furthermore, it is possible to reset the selection ranges
for reflection search to the default values. The pattern diagram is displayed in the C area.
Noise can be excluded when selecting the analysis ranges. By moving the edges of the yellow
rectangle the analysis ranges can be changed. The newly selected areas are then used within the
reflection analysis. After changes to the analysis ranges, it is always necessary to run the reflection
analysis again.

Figure 8.11: Analysis Pattern (DAC test)

Figure 8.12 shows the pattern display for a VLF test. The A area also contains the selected
shots, which are displayed inside diagrams. On the left side of area B the pattern diagram for
the falling edge of the VLF measurement is displayed, on the right side of this area the diagram
for the rising edge of the VLF measurement is shown. The complete displayed area of the pattern
is used for the reflection search and therefore no area selection is necessary.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 100 of 154

A B

Figure 8.12: Analysis Pattern (VLF test)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 101 of 154

8.3.6 Pulses
The pulse overview shows for the individual shots ( A cf. Figure 8.13) the phase resolved TE
events of the first period. In the right area ( B ) the pulse data of the selected shot are then
displayed. The upper portion of B displays the calculated values as well as the used attenuation
of the selected shot.

A B

Figure 8.13: Pulses Overview (DAC test)

In a VLF test, the position of the PD events during the overturning process of the selected shot
is shown in the pulse diagram. The remaining information are displayed in the same way as in a
DAC test.

A B

Figure 8.14: Pulses Overview (VLF test)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 102 of 154

8.3.7 VLF
The VLF overview shows the time curve of the voltage during the test. In the area A in Fig-
ure 8.15 the complete measurement overview is displayed in the upper area. In the lower area the
more detailed measurement results are displayed during the test, whereby the complete overturn
processes are recognizable during the test.

Figure 8.15: VLF Overview

This view is only available for a VLF test.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 103 of 154

8.3.8 Reflections
The reflection overview (cf. Figure 8.16) shows the detected reflections of the cable. On the left
side ( A ) all available shots are displayed. All selected shots are included in the reflection search.
In the middle section ( B ) the location mapping diagram is displayed in the lower section and a
selected reflection in the upper section of the diagram. On the right side ( C ) all found reflections
are listed. The Find Reflections button starts the analysis.

A C

Figure 8.16: Reflections Overview (Simple analysis mode)

All available measurements are displayed in the A area and can be selected or deselected indi-
vidually via the check boxes. All selected measurements are used for the analysis, all unselected
measurements are ignored and are not included in the analysis. In the reflection overview, the anal-
ysis must always be restarted using the Find reflections button if the selection of measurements
has changed.
The middle area ( B ) represents the diagrams (reflection diagram on top and fault location dia-
gram below). In both diagrams it is possible to zoom into the curves to get a more detailed view
in the zoomed area. To zoom in, hold the pressed left mouse button and select an area to be
enlarged. It is also possible to zoom in several times by selecting an area again while holding down
the left mouse button. The right mouse button is used to zoom out to the original view.
The blue line between the two diagrams can be used to adjusted the size of the reflection and fault
location diagram. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, the line is moved up or down until the
desired size is reached.
Inside the reflection diagram a selected signal is shown. For the selection of a reflection signal
there are two ways. On the one hand, in the C area you can click directly on a found position.
The selected reflection is displayed in the upper diagram and framed with a blue circle in the fault
location diagram. Another way to select a reflection is to hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard
and use the left mouse button to select the desired position in the fault location diagram.
Within the reflection diagram, the detailed signal used to determine the distance is displayed after
selecting a position. The distance was calculated from the starting point of the first peak signal to
the starting point of the reflection. In the diagram, these points are marked with two red vertical
lines. The second vertical line can be moved with the help of the left mouse button to change the
start position of the reflection. This automatically results in a recalculation of the position for the
origin of the signal. This recalculation triggers a movement of the position in the fault location
diagram and in the length of the defect is adjusted in the list ( C ) automatically. This adjustment
can lead to a better localization of the defect.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 104 of 154

If the advanced mode has been selected inside analysis configuration (see Section 8.1.4), additional
options for the reflection search are available, which are depicted in Figure 8.17 A . Use the
Reflection minimum trigger level slider to set the minimum level reflection search. A higher value
will find more reflections, but it can also produce more results, which is no real reflection. The
sensitivity can also be adjusted using the buttons or . Using the button the sensitivity is
reset to the default value.
The TDR calibration curve can be shown if the option Show calibration curve information is
checked. This will display a green curve with the TDR calibration data.
If the option Show damping curve information is enable a new violet curve is displayed with the
damped information between the first and second peak of the reflection.
The option Invert location mapping can be used if the reflection positions from the other end of
the cable should to be displayed. The check box Synchronize to Double Side is only available if
the configuration option Double Side analysis has been activated. With the help of this option,
the found reflections will be available for the double side analysis.
With the buttons Location Mapping and Histogram one can toggle between these two diagrams.
In image 8.17 the histogram can be seen. Furthermore the result of choosing Sort by location in
the configuration can be seen.
If the advanced option Double Side Analysis is enabled inside the configuration (cf. Section 8.1.4)
the reflections can be added to the double side analysis mapping by enabling the option Synchro-
nize to Double Side. This will add each of the available signal events to the mapping of the double
side.

In Figure 8.17 several buttons are depicted with B can be used to navigate through the list of
available signal event and noise events.
The buttons Add to noise [F3] and Next signal [F4] allows to navigate through the list of available
signal events. The button Add to noise [F3] or short cut F3 will remove the selected reflection
candidate to the list of noise events and the next reflection candidate is automatically selected.
The button Next signal [F4] or short cut F4 can be used to go to the next event inside the available
signal event list without removing from the list (the event will be accept as real location).
The buttons Restore [F5] and Next noise [F6] allows to navigate through the list of available noise
signals. With button Restore [F5] or short cut F5 the selected noise event will be moved back to
the list of available signal events and selects the next noise event. The button Next noise [F6] or
short cut F6 will go to the next noise event inside the list. Per default the noise events are not
visible inside the location mapping. With the option Show noise events all the data within the
noise event list will be displayed inside the location mapping. The noise events are with the same
symbol like defines for each phase in gray color.

All changed settings for the reflection search are only applied when a new
search is started using the Find Reflections button.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 105 of 154

Figure 8.17: Reflections Overview (Advanced analysis mode)

Figure 8.18: Reflections Overview (Advanced analysis mode with histogram)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 106 of 154

8.3.9 Details
The detail view contains various diagrams of measured values of all shots. Figure 8.19 shows the
general structure of the detail overview. The upper section A contains the buttons to switch
between the individual diagrams. The corresponding diagrams are then displayed in the B area.

Figure 8.19: The DAC Analysis Details

This view is only available for DAC tests.

Capacitance
In Figure 8.20 the capacity of individual shots is represented. All values of the individual shots
for one voltage level (U/U0 ) are averaged and then displayed in the diagram.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 107 of 154

Figure 8.20: Capacitance

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 108 of 154

Frequency
In Figure 8.21 the frequency of individual shots is represented. All values of the individual shots
for one voltage level (U/U0 ) are averaged and then displayed in the diagram.

Figure 8.21: Frequency

Damping factor
Figure 8.22 shows the damping factor of the individual shots. All values of the individual shots
for one voltage level (U/U0 ) are averaged and then displayed in the diagram.

Figure 8.22: Damping factor

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 109 of 154

Approx. Tan δ Cable

In Figure 8.23 the approx. Tan δ of the cable of individual shots presented. All values of the
individual shots for one voltage level (U/U0 ) are averaged and then displayed in the diagram.

Figure 8.23: Approx. Tan δ Cable

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 110 of 154

8.3.10 Report
After all test have been finished, the measurement analysis can be composed into a report. The
report can be created as Word (cf. Section Generate Word report) or CSV file (cf. Section Generate
CSV report). Figure 8.24 shows the report view. The report view is separated into three parts. In
A the report details of the measurement are depicted. The center area ( B ) allows to add notes
which should be contained inside the report. To add the notes a simple text editor is available.
With the buttons Previous Section and Next Section it is possible to switch between the different
parts inside the report. In Table 8.2 all available sections of the report are described. The bottom
area ( C ) can be used to select the report type and opening the finished reports.

Figure 8.24: The automatic report generation

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 111 of 154

Section Description

Additional information about the test setup can be

Test Setup
entered.

TDR calibration result Information for the TDR calibration can be entered.

Information for the diagrams complete measurement

VLF Test Results: Voltage over
overview and detailed measurement value can be
Time Diagram
added. This input is only available during a VLF test.

PD Test Results: PRPDA/PD

Detection
Information for the PRPDA pattern can be entered.
VLF Test Results: PRPDA/PD
Detection

PD Test Results: PD Location Information to the fault location mapping data can be
Mapping entered.

Allows to append notes for the detailed diagrams (Ca-

pacitance, Frequency, Damping factor and Approx.
Detailed Analysis
Tan δ). This input is only available during a DAC
test.

Conclusion Allows to enter a conclusion for the test.

Table 8.2: Report sections

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 112 of 154

Generate Word report

For the generation of a Word report the tool button is used to select Generate Word. The user
interface displays the option for the generation of the Word report. In the middle of section C in
Figure 8.25 the template for the word report can be selected from the selection box. The selection
box contains all found template which are contained inside the provided report template folder.
The selected template is automatically saved. When using the Word report type the first time the
last template is automatically selected.

Figure 8.25: Word report template selection

Word report will be created by click onto the Generate Word button. After a successful generated
report (cf. Figure 8.26) the name of the report and two additional buttons are shown. The button
Open Report open the Word file inside a office program which allows to open Word documents.
With the button Show in Explorer the Windows Explorer is open where the generated Word file
is located. The button allows to go back to the Word template selection.

Figure 8.26: Successful generated Word Report

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.3. RESULT OVERVIEW AFTER TEST Page 113 of 154

Generate CSV report

The tool button is used to selected Generate CSV. By clicking the button Generate CSV, the CSV
report will be generated. After a successful generated report (cf. Figure 8.27) the name of the
report and two additional buttons are shown. With button Open Report it is possible to open the
CSV file inside a program which allows to open CSV files. The button Show in Explorer opens
the Windows Explorer where the CSV file is located. The resulting CSV file will be formatted
in UTF-8 text file. Values are separated by a single colon character ’,’. Character string are
contained in "". The file contains the meta data of the measurement in the first two lines, followed
by an empty line. Line 4 and 5 contain the average values for the capacitance, frequency and
temperature, which are again followed by an blank line. After this blank line, a line containing the
header information of the measurement is added. The following lines contain the exact measured
data of each shot. The line of the last shot is followed by a blank line. The last line in the file
contains the location information for all point found during the analysis.

Figure 8.27: Successful generated CSV Report

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.4. IMPORT OF OLD MEASUREMENT Page 114 of 154

8.4 Import of old measurement

This section describes how to import measurement data from the old DAC software (DAC mea-
surement software version 1.x).

The import of old measurement data is only possible if the Advanced Analysis
Mode is selected and the option Data Import Support is activated.

For importing data, select the sub application Import. The import is divided into two areas (see
Figure 8.28). The left pane ( A ) contains a selection window that displays all available folders. In
the upper area, the Parent folder button allows you to move to a higher folder level. The button
Switch to default data folder changes to the default data folder selected within the DAC catalog
configuration (see Section 6.1). A simple left mouse click is used to open a folder. If there is an
old measurement file in the selected folder which can be imported, this is displayed in the B
area. (see Figure 8.29). By selecting the found file, the Import Selected button is activated and
can be used to start the data import. As soon as the data import has been started, a progress bar
(see Figure 8.30) appears next to the button Import Selected, which shows the current progress of
the data import. All buttons are deactivated during the import. After the import is finished, the
complete path with the file name at the bottom is displayed in the B area (cf. Figure 8.31). If
the mouse pointer is moved over the path, the complete path appears as a tool tip. In order to
be able to open and analyze the imported file afterwards, you have to go into the Open file and
select the imported file. The selection of measurement files is described in Section 8.2.1.

Figure 8.28: Selection for import folder

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.4. IMPORT OF OLD MEASUREMENT Page 115 of 154

Figure 8.29: File selection for the import

Figure 8.30: Progress of the import

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.4. IMPORT OF OLD MEASUREMENT Page 116 of 154

Figure 8.31: Data import finished

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.5. DOUBLE SIDE ANALYSIS Page 117 of 154

8.5 Double Side Analysis

This section describes how different measurements can be displayed and thus compared as double
side analysis. In the following explanation, a DAC measurement and a double side measurement
are compared, but it is also possible to compare different DAC measurements with each other.
However, this comparison only makes sense if the cable is the same.

Double side analysis is only possible if Advanced Analysis Mode is selected and
the Double Side Analysis option is enabled.

For the double side analysis it is necessary to evaluate individual measurements and the option
Synchronize to Double Side must be selected. In Figures 8.32 and 8.33 a DAC measurement and the
corresponding double side measurement are displayed within the reflection view. In both figures
the fault location diagram can be seen in the B area. Both measurements were selected for the
double side analysis (cf. A in Figure 8.32 and Figure 8.33).

Figure 8.32: Fault location DAC measurement

The double side analysis can be open when the sub application Double Side. In Figure 8.34 the
double side analysis is displayed. In area A , a selection box is available containing all cable
lengths available for this analysis. Identical cable lengths are displayed only once.
With the button Clear Double Side Mapping it is possible to remove the data from the locating
diagram. The option Synchronize to Double Side is deactivated in all selected analyzes.
The area B is used for displaying double side fault location diagram. All fault location data
from a DAC measurement are displayed in orange and all fault location data from a double side
measurement are displayed in green.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.5. DOUBLE SIDE ANALYSIS Page 118 of 154

Figure 8.33: Fault location Double Side measurement

Figure 8.34: Fault location double side analysis

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

9
DAC word report template

This section describes the creation of customized Word report templates. Section 9.1 contains the
description where to find the existing templates and how to create a new one. The section 9.3
contains all available key words which can be used to fill the report with data. Using the word
reporting requires the python scripting functionality, which is contained inside the OHV Suite and
will be installed automatically. The word template can contain plausibility checks for the data
which are inserted into the report. A syntax description for defining custom templates with small
examples can be found in section 9.2.

The translations of the report content must be done by the user. The values
of the report will never contain any translations.

9.1 Word report template

The OHV Suite provide it’s own default Word templates which can be used for the report gen-
eration. These templates will be copied into the public documents folder with sub folders: ’ohv
diagnostic GmbH/Report Templates’. Template file names have the following structure:
TYPE_report_template_LANGUAGE.docx.

TYPE is the type of the report template. The supported types are dac (for normal DAC
reports) and dacvlf (for VLF reports).
LANGUAGE is the language code which is supported through the OHV Suite.

If you want to create your own report templates, it is highly recommended to copy an existing
template and save it under a different file name in the same location as the default templates. The
default templates may be changed or extended in future OHV Suite versions, which can lead to
conflicts with changed templates saved under the name of a default template, ultimately bringing
the risk that your changes will be overwritten when the application updates it’s default templates.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.2. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE SYNTAX Page 120 of 154

9.2 Word report template syntax

Report templates are ordinary word documents with the exception, that they contain placeholders
for the report data. In this section the usage of these placeholder is briefly explained, so users will
be able to create their own templates.

9.2.1 Basic placeholder usage

Placeholders start with two curly brackets and end with two closing curly brackets. Enclosed by
the two pairs of curly brackets, the identifier or name of the placeholder is given. An example
with the resulting replacement can be seen below (cf. Figure 9.1). As it can be seen, the identifier
and the surrounding brackets should be separated by spaces. Also notice, that the formatting of
the placeholder was inherited by the result. In general, if the placeholder text is formatted in a
special way, the text replacing it will inherit the formatting. If the placeholder is to be replaced
by a picture, the picture will at least inherit the layout formatting, e.g. when the placeholder
is centered, the picture will be too. In the example, the placeholder MyTextPlaceholder is
replaced by text and MyImagePlaceholder with an picture.

Figure 9.1: Basic Placeholder example

9.2.2 Basic statement usage

Placeholders of the form {% Statement %} are so called statements. Technically they aren’t
placeholders but used to control the output when processing a template. For example, statements
can be used to replace placeholders only under certain conditions or to generate tables with dynamic
row count. Statements will be executed and not replaced. Lines with statements will not be part
of the resulting output.

Placeholders of the form {{ Placeholder }} will be replaced with content.

Statements of the form {% Statement %} will not be part of the output but
will be executed while processing the template.

9.2.3 Conditional statement - IF statement

This subsection describes how to use conditional statements and how to check if placeholders
contain plausible data. Listing 9.1 shows an example of conditional placeholder usage. The first
example starts on line number 1. The example show how to check if a placeholder was defined.
This is done by using the if statement follow by the placeholder name. Only if the condition is
fulfilled, the resulting document will contain the text in line 3, e.g. when the placeholder in the
example is defined. Only if the condition is not fulfilled, the text after the else will be part of
the resulting document. Each if has to be ended with an endif statement, as shown. Only text
enclosed by the if and endif statements will be affected by the condition checking. The else
path is optional as can be seen in the example starting in line number 9. This example shows
how to check a placeholder for a special value, in this case it is compared to an empty character

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.2. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE SYNTAX Page 121 of 154

1 This is an example.
2 {% if condition %}
3 Condition is fulfilled!
4 {% else %}
5 Condition is not fulfilled!
6 {% endif %}
7 This text will not be affected by the condition.
8
9 This is an example with nested placeholders and comparison.
10 {% if condition != "" %}
11 Condition is not empty and contains {{ condition }}
12 {% endif %}

Listing 9.1: Example of conditional placeholders

string and the condition is only fulfilled, if the placeholder contains some text. As seen in line
11 placeholders can be nested. The example only adds the text in line 11 and the text, that the
placeholder condition contains, only if the placeholder contains text.

9.2.4 Filling template tables - FOR statement

This subsection will explain how to create templates for tables and how they are filled with data.
Figure 9.2 shows an example table definition and the result. Let’s assume we have a list of data we
want to process and display in table form. The list contains cities and each city has a name and a
postcode. In the example we process a list containing two entries [Dresden, 01127] and [Dresden,
01069]. For each list element there is a placeholder name and code defined. A third placeholder
city_list is defined which refers to our list of cities. The template now defines a header row,
which will not be affected. The next row uses statement consisting of tr to create a new table row
and the for statement, which will be used to iterate through the elements of the list city_list
refers to. In this case city is no placeholder and is simply used to refer to the current element
of the list. In the next row city.name and city.code are placeholders used to access data
behind name and code of the current city. To end the row, the statement {% tr endfor %} is
used. Please note that this will only work with lists of elements.

Figure 9.2: Template table example

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.3. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE CONTENT Page 122 of 154

9.3 Word report template content

This section describes the existing keys which can be used inside the word report templates. These
keys can be used as placeholder inside the template document and will be replaced with the content
from the reporting. In Section 9.3.1 contains all available keys which can be used inside DAC
and VLF report template. In sub section 9.3.2 all keys are listed, which can be used in DAC
report templates only. The Section 9.3.3 lists all keys which can be used for VLF report templates.
Besides a brief description, the tables also list the type of the data which the placeholders refer to.

9.3.1 Word report template key for all report templates

The table 9.1 contains all available keys which can be used inside DAC and VLF report template.

Key Type Description

Contains the unique report ID containing of

dac_report_id String the first 3 letters of the cable name and an
increased report counter with 3 digits.
The name of the cable on which the test was
dac_cable_name String
performed.
dac_location String The location where the test was performed.
dac_measurement_date String The date when the test was performed.
The name of the tester who performs the
dac_tester_name String
test.
dac_tester_address String The address of the tester.
dac_tester_contact_details String The contact details of the tester.
The name of substation on the near end of
dac_cable_near_end String
cable.
The name of the substation on the far end
dac_cable_far_end String
of cable
dac_cable_owner String The cable owner.
The comment which was added during the
dac_test_comment String
test.
dac_current_date String The current date.
The software name which was used to per-
dac_software_name String
form the report.
The software version which was used to per-
dac_software_version String
form the report.
The minimum value of the capacitance as
dac_capacitance_minimum String
formatted string with unit.
The maximum value of the capacitance as
dac_capacitance_maximum String
formatted string with unit.
The average value over all measurements
dac_capacitance_average String for the capacitance as formatted string with
unit.
The minimum value of the temperature as
dac_temperature_minimum String
formatted string with unit.
The maximum value of the temperature as
dac_temperature_maximum String
formatted string with unit.
The average value over all measurements for
dac_temperature_average String the temperature as formatted string with
unit.
The minimum value of the damping factor
dac_damping_factor_minimum String
as formatted string with unit.

Continued on next page

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.3. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE CONTENT Page 123 of 154

Table 9.1 – Continued from previous page

Key Return Description

The maximum value of the damping factor

dac_damping_factor_maximum String
as formatted string with unit.
The average value over all measurements for
dac_damping_factor_average String the damping factor as formatted string with
unit.
The minimum value of the estimated cable
dac_estimated_tandelta_cable_minimumString
tan delta as formatted string with unit.
The maximum value of the estimated cable
dac_estimated_tandelta_cable_maximum
String
tan delta as formatted string with unit.
The average value over all measurements for
dac_estimated_tandelta_cable_average String the estimated cable tan delta as formatted
string with unit.
The length of the cable as formatted string
dac_cable_length String
with unit.
dac_cable_topology String The cable topology.
The cable voltage U0 as rms value formatted
dac_cable_rms_value String
as string with unit.
The cable voltage U0 as peak value format-
dac_cable_peak_value String
ted as string with unit.
The comment which was added into the re-
dac_cable_comment String
port text editor for the cable.
The used gain factor during TDR calibra-
dac_tdr_gain String
tion.
The relative magnitude of the TDR calibra-
dac_tdr_relative_magnitude String
tion.
dac_tdr_velocity String The velocity of the cable.
The comment which was added into the re-
dac_tdr_comment String
port text editor for the TDR calibration.
The comment which was added into the re-
dac_pattern_comment String
port text editor for the pattern.
The comment which was added into the re-
dac_location_comment String
port text editor for the location.
The comment which was added into the re-
dac_conclusion_comment String
port text editor for the conclusion.
Is the mapping of the cable structure as im-
age with the phase name as description. For
List of El-
cable_structure_pics accessing the data the key ’image’ is for the
ements
cable structure image and ’desc’ to access
the description of the cable (phase name).
dac_tdr_data Image Contains the TDR diagram as an image.
Contains the list of all available analysis re-
gions which where used during the reflection
detection. Each entry have the following pa-
rameter which can be accessed in a loop:
List of El- ’index’ is the current number of the analy-
dac_analyze_area_list
ements sis area, ’startPhase’ is the phase where the
area starts, ’endPhase’ is the phase where
the area ends, ’minSignal’ is the minimum
signal where the area starts and ’maxSignal’
is the maximum signal where the area ends
dac_analyze_phase_ranges Integer Is the number of used analysis areas.

Continued on next page

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.3. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE CONTENT Page 124 of 154

Table 9.1 – Continued from previous page

Key Return Description

Contains the image of the location mapping

with corresponding phase name. For access-
List of El-
dac_location_mapping_list ing the data the key ’image’ is for the loca-
ements
tion mapping image and ’desc’ to access the
description of the cable (phase name).
Contains the image of the location histogram
dac_location_histogram_data Image
diagram.

Table 9.1: Word report template keys for all report tempates

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.3. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE CONTENT Page 125 of 154

9.3.2 Word report template key for DAC report templates

This section contains all keys which are only available if a DAC report should be created. In
table 9.2 all keys are contained which can be used in DAC report templates only.

The key dac_number_of_shots is used to detect a report template for the DAC
report.

Key Type Description

dac_number_of_shots Integer The number of shots during the test.

The minimum value of the frequency as for-
dac_frequency_minimum String
matted string with unit.
The maximum value of the frequency as for-
dac_frequency_maximum String
matted string with unit.
The average value over all measurements for
dac_frequency_average String
the frequency as formatted string with unit.
The comment which was added into the re-
dac_analysis_comment String
port text editor for the analysis.
dac_pattern_data Image Contains the pattern diagram as an image.
Contains the images for detail diagrams with
corresponding cable phase name. Each en-
try can accessed in a loop with follow-
ing parameters: ’desc’ is the cable phase
name, ’image_frequency’ is the image of
List of El-
dac_damping_analysis_list the frequency diagram, ’image_capacitance’
ements
is the image of the capacitance diagram,
’image_damping_factor’ is the image of
the damping factor diagram and ’im-
age_tan_delta’ is the image of the approx.
tan delta diagram.

Table 9.2: Word report template keys for DAC report templates

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.3. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE CONTENT Page 126 of 154

9.3.3 Word report template key for VLF report templates

This section contains all keys which are only available if a VLF report should be created. The
table 9.3 contains all keys which can be used for VLF report templates.

The key dacvlf_measure_duration is used to detect a report template for the

VLF report.

Key Type Description

dacvlf_measure_duration String Contains the duration of the VLF test.

The comment which was added into the re-
dacvlf_overview_comment String
port text editor for the overview.
Contains the pattern diagram for the rising
dacvlf_rising_pattern_data Image
edge as image.
Contains the pattern diagram for the falling
dacvlf_falling_pattern_data Image
edge as image.
Contains the image for the complete VLF
dacvlf_complete_measurement_data Image
overview diagram.
Contains the image for the detailed VLF
dacvlf_detailed_measurement_data Image
overview diagram.

Table 9.3: Word report template keys for VLF report templates

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

10
DAC system synchronization

This chapter describes the information of the system synchronization.

The system synchronization is a separate part of the DAC system which could be ordered. The
synchronization is developed to synchronize the status information between multiple DAC devices
which are available inside on line measurement. This makes sense for DAC system which contains
one control unit and at least one double side device. Maybe it is required to have additional devices
to perform joint measurements. For a single DAC system it is not required and make no sense to
use a synchronization module.

10.1 Synchronization hardware

As base of the synchronization module it is required to have a sim module which are communicate
with a server. The server will be used to store and hold the last information for the device statuses.
The status is written to the server by the OHV Suite for each device and each device request the
status information of the other devices which should be synchronized. The configuration for this
must be done by ohv diagnostic GmbH.

10.2 Synchronization view

Figure 10.1 displays a potential synchronization view. Inside the is view there are three parts
which will be synchronized (marked with A , B and C ).

A B C

Figure 10.1: Synchronization view

Each of the parts contains the information of the current connection and the states for ready, HV
on, charging and error. The following table contains the different parts and the available led color.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.2. SYNCHRONIZATION VIEW Page 128 of 154

Element Description

First line Contains the name of the device. The LED means that the device is not
connected to the synchronization server. If the LED is the connection
could be established.

Ready Defines the ready status of the device. The LED means that the device
is not in a ready state. The LED signalize that the device is ready for
use, the key switch and the emergency stop button are activated.

HV on LED signalize that the HV switch is off and no high voltage could be
supplied. The LED signalize that the high voltage is switched on.

Charging If this LED is , the cable is charged with voltage on a high voltage
source or is waiting for voltage for a joint or double side device. If the
LED is device not charging or not waiting.

Error If this LED is , an error has occurred.

Table 10.1: Synchronization system view status LED’s

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

A
General Information

This chapter describes the general overview of the OHV Suite software. The software has a modular
structure so that different modules can be loaded during run time. This chapter does not deal
with the different modules, but describes the general handling of the application. The main focus
here is to obtain important information such as the software version, contact information and main
settings.

A.1 General software structure

The general structure of the software is split into two main parts. In Figure A.1 the structure of
OHV Suite can be seen.

A B

Figure A.1: Logical software structure

On left side of the software, marked with A , all available applications are shown and can be
selected. The right part of the software, marked with B , is used for displaying the screen for the
selected application.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 130 of 154

A.2 Start screen - Main application

After starting of OHV Suite software the start screen with the main application 1 is shown (cf.
Figure A.2).

A
B

1 2

C
D

II

Figure A.2: Start screen (marked important information)

The left side contains the different applications which are marked with I and II . Here I
represents the selected application and II all other non-selected applications. 1 contains all
available sub application options which are available for the main application. The right side 2
displays the first sub application page ( A ). On this page all available applications are listed.
The start screen can be reached by clicking on the button I and than on button A . The main
application contains the following sub applications:

A Welcome page, which displays the start screen

B Settings page, which allows to change application settings

C About page, which displays the general information

D Allows to close the OHV Suite software

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 131 of 154

A.2.1 Settings
The settings could be reached by using the B (cf. Figure A.2) button. The selected sub settings
page is shown on the right side.

Common settings
The OHV Suite software is written as multi-language application which allows to switch between
different languages. Each different languages can be selected on the common settings page. By
changing a new language the application is automatically switched into the new selected language
without restarting. Additionally the OHV Suite software allows to check for new updates. Details
about the software update can be read in Section C.1.

1
2
3

Figure A.3: General settings

Available licensing packages

The OHV Suite software contains several packages which are licensed and can be purchased sepa-
rately. The list of available licensed packages and the current status of them can be seen below the
Software Updates (marked with A in Figure A.3). The list is only visible if at least one license
package is available inside the software.
Licensed packages are bound to the local machine where the software is installed. For installing
the software on a new machine the activation is no longer valid and must be done again. Updating
the software will not change the activation state of the licensed packages.
For each of available package a description (which is not localized), the license identification and
the current status is shown. If a package is successfully licensed the status Package activated is
shown on the right side of the license identification and on the left side the icon is green.
Packages which are currently not activated will display three buttons on the right side of the license
identification. The button can be used to copy the license identification to the clipboard. The
button e-mail will open the registered e-mail program and adds the license identification directly
into the e-mail which could be send to ohv diagnostic GmbH for retrieving the activation code. To
activate a package the button Activate must be clicked. It will open a new window (cf. Figure A.4)
which allows to insert the retrieved activation code and activate the license. The button (2)

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 132 of 154

can be used to insert the activation code from the clipboard into the text field ( 1 ). By clicking
on the Save button ( 3 ) the license activation will be saved.

2 3
1

Figure A.4: Package activation

After inserting and saving the activation code the application must be closed
and restarted!

Application selection
This setting can be reached by a click on the button marked with 2 inside the settings page.
On the top of the application settings (cf. A on Figure A.5) all available applications are listed.
These applications can be enabled or disabled inside the OHV Suite software.

Disabled applications could not be used and are not shown inside the applica-
tion list.

1
2
3

Figure A.5: Application selection

On the bottom of the application settings (cf. B on Figure A.5) all modules are listed which
are required to provide different functionality used inside the OHV Suite software. These modules
could not be disabled like the applications above.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 133 of 154

Each of these parts have its own program version. The different version information can be shown
by using the mouse and hover over the module or application. After a short time a tool-tip is
shown with all information of the module or application.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 134 of 154

General Application Settings

The general application settings can be selected with button 3 in Figure A.6. Within this section
all the available application settings can be found. These settings depends on the application
that was detected during the loading of different libraries when starting the OHV Suite. When
an application setting is selected on the the left side (cf. A on Figure A.6) the setting can be
modified.

1
2
3

A B

Figure A.6: General Application settings

Catalog The DAC Catalog settings are described inside section 6.1.

Measurement The DAC measurement settings are described inside section 7.1.

Analysis The Analysis settings are described inside section 8.1.

Scripting Host The scripting host settings are described in section B.2.

Diagram The diagram settings are described in section B.1.

Advanced settings
The button 4 in Figure A.5 shows a window for inserting a password which enables advanced
settings. These extended settings are only available for the developers and service technicians of
ohv diagnostic GmbH.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 135 of 154

A.2.2 About

Figure A.7: About information

This page contains all information about the OHV Suite software and the contact information.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

B
General Application settings

This chapter describes the general application settings available in the OHV Suite software. Inside
the application settings, available will be the basic settings (cf. A on Figure B.1) for all the
selected applications like the PD Analysis, Measurement, Analysis, Catalog. The settings for all
the other applications varies with the type of the application.

1
2
3

A B

Figure B.1: Application settings

B.1 Diagram Settings

Along with these settings, an option for selecting the Diagrams export folder is available (cf. B
on Figure B.1). The export folder is used to store the diagram data exports and diagram images.

B.2 Scripting Host

The scripting host contains a list with all available registered scripting provider. Depending on
the registered scripting host different options are available. Currently the scripting languages Lua
and Python are supported.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

C
Software Update

This chapter describes how to update the OHV Suite software and the device software.

C.1 Updating OHV Suite software

The next sections containing the information how the OHV Suite software can be updated.

C.1.1 Checking software update

This section describes how the checking for a software update can be done. The software update
check can be found if the main application will be opened, then navigate over Open settings and
Common to the common settings overview. How to navigate inside the OHV Suite software is
described in Chapter A.
The button Check for updates (cf. Figure C.1, A ) can be used if a new update for the OHV Suite
software is available. When a new version was found a message box is shown (cf. Figure C.2).
If there is no update available this information is depicted inside the status information like in
Figure C.1.

Figure C.1: Checking for update

C.1.2 Downloading software update

Downloading the software can be done in two ways. The first option is to perform the download
automatically with the software or manually over the homepage.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
C.1. UPDATING OHV SUITE SOFTWARE Page 138 of 154

Figure C.2: Update available

For downloading the latest version through the software the Yes button of the message box C.2
must be clicked. This will start the download immediately. The user interface will be changed for
displaying the current status of the download progress like shown in Figure C.3.

Figure C.3: Downloading update

If the download should be performed manually the No button of the message box C.2 must be
clicked. The user interface depicted now a button Download update manually (cf. Figure C.4).
By clicking this button the web browser is opened with the web site where the download could be
select manually.

C.1.3 Installing software update

Installing the update can also be done in two ways. The first way is to start the installation from
the software directly by pressing the button Install (cf. Figure C.5). If the downloaded file is
not available the message box C.6 is appeared that the downloaded file is missing. Otherwise the
download is started automatically and the software is closed directly.
The second way to install the new software is to start the setup manually from the download folder
or where the browser is storing the downloaded files.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
C.1. UPDATING OHV SUITE SOFTWARE Page 139 of 154

Figure C.4: Manual download

Figure C.5: Download finished

Figure C.6: Download file missing

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
C.2. UPDATING DEVICE SOFTWARE Page 140 of 154

C.2 Updating device software

The software suite supports upgrading the device software. This section will explain how this can
be done.
After to connection to the device was established successfully, the device overview will be shown,
as can be seen in Image C.7. Next to the device status and software version information the Update
button can be found at the bottom right of the area marked with A .

Figure C.7: Information about the chosen device

When the button is clicked, the update will start. The button now will be replaced by a progress
bar which indicates the progress of the update (image C.8). Next to the progress bar on the left
side information will be displayed what version of the device software is installing.

Don’t interrupt the update by shutting off the device or in any other way!

When the upgrade is finished, the software will inform about this event by showing a message
similar as in Image C.9. The application will now be closed and has to be restarted. After this,
the upgrade is done.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
C.2. UPDATING DEVICE SOFTWARE Page 141 of 154

Figure C.8: Updating in process

Figure C.9: Information about finished upgrade

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

D
Connection manager

This chapter describes how to establish a connection to a device. To be able to connect to a device,
the connection management must be opened. The general structure of the connection management
is shown in Figure D.1. In general there are two different options for establishing a connection to
a device. The first one is the auto discovery method of the devices itself or as second option it is
possible to manage the connection by the different device types. Switching between the different
parts can be done by using the button inside the section marked with A .

Figure D.1: Connection manager

If the the auto discovery method is used all devices which are found will be shown in a list see
Figure D.2 A . Depending on the software different device types can be automatically detected,
in this case the software detects DAC and PDD devices. The list of detected devices will be auto-
matically refreshed if a new device is detected or a device is no longer available. For establishing
a connection to a device inside the list only a double click to the device is required. This will
automatically open a connection and the user interface is forwarded to the device overview for the
connected device.

If there are no devices found inside a couple of seconds an information will be shown that no
devices are detected (Figure D.3 A ). Here it is possible to switch automatically to the Manage
Connections.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page 143 of 154

Figure D.2: Auto detected devices

Figure D.3: No devices found

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
D.1. MANAGE CONNECTIONS Page 144 of 154

D.1 Manage Connections

Managing connections for devices allows to connect to different device types. Figure D.4 show the
different device types which can be used for the connection. The view can differ and some of the
device types are not shown if the connection to these device types are not allowed or supported
by the used software.

D
Figure D.4: Manage connections

In area A all connected devices are displayed with the current connection states. The different
states for the connection are described inside Table D.1. The area B allows to switch between the
different types of devices which could be used for a connection. After selecting a type of devices a
list with all automatically detected devices are shown inside the list marked with C . Like in the
Auto discovery mode the found devices can be double clicked to establish the connection to the
device. On the bottom of the view D contains a button Click here to show connection parameter
where an additional view for the device type specific connection options are shown. The different
options for device connections are described in the section of each device type itself.

Element Description

Establishing connection An attempt is made to connect to the device with the spec-
ified IP address and port (cf. Figrue D.5a).

Connection established The connection to the device was successfully established

(cf. Figrue D.5c). The text Disconnect is displayed on the
right. Clicking on this label disconnects the connection to
the device.

Connection failed No connection to the device could be established (cf. Fi-

grue D.5b). The text Connect is displayed on the right.
Clicking this label will attempt to reconnect to the device.

Table D.1: Connection status

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
D.1. MANAGE CONNECTIONS Page 145 of 154

(a) Establishing connection

(b) Connection failed

(c) Connection established

Figure D.5: Connection status

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
D.1. MANAGE CONNECTIONS Page 146 of 154

D.1.1 Manual connection to DAC devices

For a manual connection to a DAC device the following fields (cf. Table D.2) must be filled in. By
a single left-click on a device in the device list, the input fields are filled with the required data to
connect to this specific device.

Figure D.6: Manual connection

Element Description

Device IP Address The static IPv4 address of the device must be entered in
this field. This is normally attached to the device. The
concrete procedure for network configuration is described
in the corresponding manual of the device.

Connection Port Here you can specify an alternative port for the connection.

Connection timeout This field specifies timeout after which a connection is in-
terrupted.

Table D.2: Connection input elements for a DAC device

After all settings have been made, a connection to the device can be established by clicking the
Connect to device button. To finish the connection, it is required to confirm that the shown safety
rules where read as can be seen in D.7. The device is now displayed in the connection overview.
Depending on the connection status, the information is also displayed in the device overview. The
following status messages are described in Table D.1:

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
D.1. MANAGE CONNECTIONS Page 147 of 154

Figure D.7: Confirm safety rules.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

E
Remote support

This chapter describes how to use the remote support tool. When installing OHV Suite, you can
also install the additional program for remote support. This makes it possible to connect the
ohv diagnostic GmbH to the customer’s computer in order to clarify problems directly with the
customer and to see the work steps. An active Internet connection is required for remote support.
The TeamViewer service is used as a remote support tool, via which the connection is established.
When starting remote support, the ohv diagnostic GmbH automatically receives a notification that
a new request exists.

E.1 Start remote support tool

The remote support tool can be searched directly via the Windows input mask. Click on the
Windows icon and then type OHV Suite Remote-Support in the Search Programs/Files text box.
If the program has been installed, the name of the program (cf. Figure E.1) will appear in the
upper area. Click on the program with the left mouse button to start the program.

Figure E.1: Start the remote support tool

E.2 Allow remote connection

The ohv diagnostic GmbH tries to establish a connection with the remote support tool, where the
customer must allow the connection. As a result, ohv diagnostic GmbH gets access to the client’s
computer.

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

F
Test object capacitance diagrams

F.1 DAC M60 maximum available test object capacitance depending

on test voltage
The following diagram shows the maximum available capacitance which can be loaded depending
on the test voltage for a DAC M60 device.

CT est [µF ]

0
0 30 60
UT est [kV ]

Figure F.1: DAC M60 test object capacitance depending on test voltage

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

G
Test object altitude

The maximum available test voltage depends on the altitude above sea level and the ambient
temperature.

The specified maximum test voltage levels are provided for 0 m above sea level and a temperature
of 20 °.

G.1 Operating height depending to the maximum voltage for a H300

device
The following diagram shows the maximum voltage output for a DAC H300 device depending on
the operating height.

Please note that at 30 °C the maximum value of the output voltage is 270 kV.
At 10 °C it is possible to reach 300 kV at 200 m above sea level.

350
T=0 °C
UM AX [kV ]

T=10 °C
300 T=20 °C
T=30 °C
T=40 °C
250 T=50 °C
T=55 °C

200

150

100
0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000
Height[m]

Figure G.1: DAC H300 maximum test voltage depending on operating height

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 List of Figures

1.1 DAC remote safety box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3.1 DAC voltage shape (50 Hz) with damping curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3.2 DAC testing equipment illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.3 Example test procedure for DAC test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.4 basic parallel equivalent circuit of an insulation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.5 Damping factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.6 Simple model for loses inside DAC test circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.7 PRPDA pattern generation from several shots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.8 PD location mapping from selected PD signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.9 Generation of a PD signal reflectogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.10 Damping curve of PD signal damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.11 PD signal (a) before and (b) after having traveled approx. 800 meters inside XLPE cable 13

5.1 Connecting the DAC device (M-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

5.2 Available connections on the control unit (M-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.3 Connecting the H-Series DAC device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.4 Available connections on the control unit (H-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.5 Setting-up calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.6 DAC system software: Welcome window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

6.1 General overview for the DAC Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

6.2 Reset to Default Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.3 Simple Mode view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.4 Modified test information in Simple Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.5 Cable voltage input in simple mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.6 Advanced confiugruation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.7 New test location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.8 New tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.9 New Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.10 New customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.11 New test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

7.1 Overview simple measurement configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

7.2 Display the switching ranges in simple measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.3 Overview advanced measurement configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.4 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.5 Device overview without started measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.6 Device overview with started measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.7 PD calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7.8 Calibration saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7.9 TDR calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.10 Bad and good TDR calibration saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.11 Update current cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page 152 of 154

7.12 Create new cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

7.13 TDR options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.14 DAC measurement overview high voltage off (simple mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.15 DAC measurement overview high voltage on (simple mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.16 Calibrator removal warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.17 Phase selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.18 Waiting for next measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.19 Continue with next phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.20 Grounding and connecting new phase warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.21 Wait for continue the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.22 Select next phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.23 DAC measurement overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.24 Disabled result view during running measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.25 Finished test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.26 Double side measurement overview high voltage off (simple mode) . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.27 Double side measurement overview high voltage on (simple mode) . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.28 Calibrator removal warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.29 Phase selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.30 Waiting for next measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.31 Continue with next phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.32 Grounding and connecting new phase warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.33 Wait for continue the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.34 Select next phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.35 Double side measurement overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.36 Disabled result view during running measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.37 Finished test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.38 VLF measurement overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.39 VLF measurement finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.40 Leakage current measurement overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.41 LC measurement finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.42 Add a comment to the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.43 Add new high voltage shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

8.1 Analysis Configuration (Simple Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

8.2 Analysis Configuration (Advanced Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.3 DAC analysis open file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.4 Select a test to analyze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.5 Analysis Overview (DAC test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
8.6 Analysis Overview (VLF test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
8.7 DAC Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8.8 VLF Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8.9 Data Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.10 TDR Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.11 Analysis Pattern (DAC test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.12 Analysis Pattern (VLF test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
8.13 Pulses Overview (DAC test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.14 Pulses Overview (VLF test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.15 VLF Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.16 Reflections Overview (Simple analysis mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.17 Reflections Overview (Advanced analysis mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.18 Reflections Overview (Advanced analysis mode with histogram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.19 The DAC Analysis Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.20 Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
8.21 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8.22 Damping factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8.23 Approx. Tan δ Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
8.24 The automatic report generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page 153 of 154

8.25 Word report template selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

8.26 Successful generated Word Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8.27 Successful generated CSV Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8.28 Selection for import folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8.29 File selection for the import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
8.30 Progress of the import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
8.31 Data import finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
8.32 Fault location DAC measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.33 Fault location Double Side measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
8.34 Fault location double side analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

9.1 Basic Placeholder example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

9.2 Template table example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

10.1 Synchronization view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

A.1 Logical software structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

A.2 Start screen (marked important information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
A.3 General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
A.4 Package activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
A.5 Application selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
A.6 General Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
A.7 About information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

B.1 Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

C.1 Checking for update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

C.2 Update available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
C.3 Downloading update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
C.4 Manual download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
C.5 Download finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
C.6 Download file missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
C.7 Information about the chosen device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
C.8 Updating in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
C.9 Information about finished upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

D.1 Connection manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

D.2 Auto detected devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
D.3 No devices found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
D.4 Manage connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
D.5 Connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
D.6 Manual connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
D.7 Confirm safety rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

E.1 Start the remote support tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

F.1 DAC M60 test object capacitance depending on test voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

G.1 DAC H300 maximum test voltage depending on operating height . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
 List of Tables

4.3 Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

5.1 Available connections on the control unit (M-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

5.2 Available connections on the control unit (H-Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

6.1 Test location options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

6.2 Tester options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.3 Cable options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.4 Customer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.5 Test procedure options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

7.1 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

7.2 Implausible configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7.3 TDR input parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.4 TDR options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.5 Result view elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.6 DAC measurement elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.7 Current DAC measurement value elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.8 Possibilities for continuing the DAC measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.9 Result view elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.10 DAC measurement elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.11 Current DAC measurement value elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.12 Result view elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.13 Double side measurement elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.14 Current Double side measurement value elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.15 Possibilities for continuing the Double side measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.16 Result view elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.17 Double side measurement elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.18 Current Double side measurement value elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.19 VLF Measurement overview elements I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.20 VLF Measurement overview elements II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.21 LC Measurement overview elements I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.22 LC Measurement overview elements II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

8.2 Report sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

9.1 Word report template keys for all report tempates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
9.2 Word report template keys for DAC report templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
9.3 Word report template keys for VLF report templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

10.1 Synchronization system view status LED’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

D.1 Connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

D.2 Connection input elements for a DAC device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Title: User’s Manual ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.002-00.002-50.23 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: April 7, 2025 01127 Dresden - Germany
User’s Manual PDD

Partial Discharge Manual

ohv diagnostic GmbH

November 24, 2023

 Imprint

Responsible for the content:

ohv diagnostic GmbH Tel.: +49 (0) 351 79527300
Großenhainer Str. 101 Fax: +49 (0) 351 79527301
01127 Dresden E-Mail: [email protected]
Germany Web: www.ohv-diagnostic.com

Legal Information:
Copyrights and other rights in the entire content are reserved for ohv diagnostic GmbH, hereinafter
called Ohv. The entire content of that manual is copyright protected. Any reproduction, trans-
mission, modification, linking or use for any other purposes, either commercially or publicly are
prohibited without written approval of Ohv. Ohv verifies and reviews the information. In spite
of all diligence, data and technology may have changed in the meantime. Liability and guarantee
for up-to-dateness, correctness and completeness can therefore not be given. Furthermore, Ohv
reserves the right to change or up-date any information at any time and without any further notice.
Ohv and its related companies reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained
therein. Without written consent of Ohv, no part of this manual is allowed to be photocopied or
reproduced, in any form. Changes and modifications of this manual are reserved by Ohv without
any previous notice. Ohv is not liable for any technical or printing errors in this manual. Likewise,
Ohv does not assume any liability for damages, which have been caused directly or indirectly while
delivering or using this material.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Revision List

Revision Date Author(s) Description

01 2017-11-14 CF Initial version
02 2017-12-07 CF Added list of figures and tables
03 2018-12-20 JP Added uhf version documentation
04 2019-03-07 PS Updated Screenshots and content
05 2019-04-30 HK Updated Screenshots and content
06 2019-11-12 PS Updated chapter partial discharge software de-
scription
07 2020-06-05 PS Added Software requirements. Updated screen-
shots and text
08 2020-06-05 CF Updated documentation. Added chapter word re-
porting
09 2020-08-18 PS Updated chapter word reporting
10 2021-02-12 JP Smaller screen shot updates
11 2021-03-23 PS Added documentation of "All Channels" view.
12 2021-06-16 BH Added VLF measurement, Qm, statistic data
view. Updated screen shots and documentation.
13 2021-09-07 BH Updated PDD-2-UHF schematics and description.
14 2022-05-11 CF Added license package documentation, updated
PDD documentation with new functionality.
15 2022-06-01 KO Updated technical description, value altitude max
edited
16 2023-04-12 CF Updated documentation with new screen shots.
Added new chapter for JSON and CSV report
17 2023-07-13 JP Added chapter for Remote-API
18 2023-10-25 CF Updated Screenshots, added documentation for
disconnecting devices, elliptic curve, Remote-API
settings and connection manager
19 2023-11-24 CF Updated Standards

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Symbols and Abbreviations

Used Symbols

This symbol displays a warning message. Warnings are important information

which are used to highlight important facts and must not be ignored!

This symbol is used to provide additional information which are an addition

to the surrounding text and may be used to prevent ambiguities.

Abbreviations
BNC Bayonet Nut Connector
GND Ground (electrical grounding)
HV High Voltage
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light-emitting diode
PD Partial Discharge
TV Test Voltage (or Synchronization Voltage)
VLC Very Low Frequency

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Contents

1 Safety Considerations 1
1.1 Important Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Responsibility and warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2 Relevant Standards 3

3 Introduction 4
3.1 Structure of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.2 Advice how to read this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

4 Application and Specification 5

4.1 Technical Specification PDD-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.2 Technical Specification PDD-2/UHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3 Technical Specification PDD-3-Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.4 Technical Specification PDD-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.5 Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.6 Operating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.7 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

5 Quickstart Guide 19
5.1 Performing a measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2 Performing a calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.1 PD calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.2 TV calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.3 Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.3.1 No measurement values displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.3.2 Calibration failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

6 Partial discharge software description 23

6.1 PDD configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1.1 Recording options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.1.2 Reporting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.1.3 Measurement options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.1.4 Display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.2 Device overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.3 General control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.3.1 Device control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.3.2 Channel control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.3.3 Measurement and recording control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.3.4 Replay control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.3.5 Reporting control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.4 Overview display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.4.1 Measurement values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page v of 102

6.4.2 Channel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

6.4.3 Status information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.5 Calibration view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.5.1 Manual calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.6 Phase resolved data view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.6.1 Pulses view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.6.2 Windowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.6.3 Elliptic Pulses view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.6.4 PRPDA view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.7 Statistic data view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.7.1 HNQ diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.7.2 HNQ time based diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.8 Time resolved data view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.8.1 Qt/Ut diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.8.2 QU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.8.3 Qm diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.8.4 Pulse counter diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.9 Gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.10 Overview of all Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.11 Fault Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.11.1 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.11.2 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.12 VLF measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.12.1 Disabled functions during VLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.12.2 Changed diagram during VLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.13 Opening recorded measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.14 Replay overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

7 Word report template 55

7.1 Word report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.2 Word report template syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.2.1 Basic placeholder usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.2.2 Basic statement usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.2.3 Conditional statements - If statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.2.4 Filling template tables - for statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.3 Word report template content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.3.1 Word report template key for report templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

8 CSV report 60
8.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.2 Section description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.2.1 Description for file version 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

9 JSON report 64
9.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.2 Section description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.2.1 Description for file version 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

10 Remote API 69
10.1 Remote API configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
10.2 Technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10.2.1 Remote-API URL structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10.2.2 Access to endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10.2.3 Read data from an endpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10.2.4 Write data from to endpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3 Remote-API endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3.1 Common Remote-API endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page vi of 102

10.3.2 Device specific Remote-API endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

A General Information 87
A.1 General software structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
A.2 Start screen - Main application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
A.2.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
A.2.2 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

B Connection Manager 93
B.1 Auto discovery of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
B.2 Manage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
B.2.1 Manage DAC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
B.2.2 Manage PDD connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
B.2.3 Manage PDD Low Cost connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

C General Application Settings 98

C.1 Diagram Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
C.2 Scripting Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

List of Figures 99

List of Tables 101

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

1
Safety Considerations

1.1 Important Safety Rules

Read the information below carefully before using this instrument.
Following general safety precautions have to be observed during op-
eration of this instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions
or with specific warning elsewhere in this manual violates safety stan-
dards for design, manufacture, and intended use of the instrument.

Each user should be aware of the contents of these guidelines before using the instrument. The
Ohv products should be handled only by skilled workers. Repairing and maintenance are only
allowed by well skilled experts. The measuring systems of Ohv are developed and tested according
to DIN EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electronic measuring set. The delivery of Ohv products
guarantees safe operation if the general safety guidelines are strictly be followed by the user. The
instruments of Ohv are designed for application under dry ambient condition. Since PD diagnosis
tests are carried out on test objects subjected to high voltage (HV), the rules for minimum safety
working distance have strictly to be followed, in order to prevent any dangerous situation. In this
respect also the charging of potential-free devices in the surroundings of HV lines has to be taken
into account. Persons which are not directly involved with the PD detection procedure must be
kept away from the testing area by means of suitable barriers clearly indicated by warning boards.
Even if the testing voltage is switched off, but the test object is not grounded by well visible
conductors, nobody is allowed to enter the measuring area. If possible, both, the test object and
the HV test supply must be installed within a closed safety testing area. All switching components
must be equipped with additional locking mechanism in order to prevent dangerous situations,
such as the test voltage being switched on by a non-authorized person. Never insert the main
plug of the measuring system in a socket, which is not grounded. It is not allowed to use power
supply cables without protective conductor. To guarantee effective safety, the power plug should be
inserted in the corresponding instrument and should be connected to a socket, before other testing
cable and measuring cable will be connected. Before attaching any measuring cable, a protective
conductor should always be connected to earth connection. In case of PD measurements in the
standard circuit the protective conductor must be joined with the grounding of the test area, which
is provided with the measuring impedance. If a detachable power supply cable is used, only cables
with a suitable rating for the device must be used. Always position the device in such a way that
it is easily possible to disconnect the power cord during operation at any given time.

A break-off of protective conductor outside of the instrument and

a break-off of protecting earth connection could cause a dangerous
situation. Never disconnect the protective conductor.

Adjustment, repairing and maintenance are not allowed, when the device is opened and connected
to the supplying operating voltage. When a blown fuse has to be replaced, it should be guaranteed
that the spare fuse has the rated current range and is of the right type. Never use a short circuited
fuse. In case of any defect, switch off the device immediately. The internal protection unit of the
device becomes ineffective, if e.g. the measuring equipment:

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
1.2. RESPONSIBILITY AND WARRANTY Page 2 of 102

Is damaged
Has been stored for long time under abnormal conditions
Has suffered transport damages.

PD detection is not allowed, if the well known general safety rules for working in the surroundings
of HV installations are not strictly be followed by the operator. A periodically training of operators
on the basis of the above given instructions is recommended urgently. The regulations of the DIN
EN 50191:2000 Installation and Operating of Electrical Test Units as well as the given safety
requirements have to be kept conscientious!

1.2 Responsibility and warranty

ohv diagnostic GmbH takes no responsibility and provides no warranty if the operator or third
parties:

Disregard this document

Do not use the product as intended
Make any kind of changes to the product (modifications, alterations, etc.)
Operate the product with accessories that are not listed in the product documentation or
approved by ohv diagnostic GmbH

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

2
Relevant Standards

This product has been developed, manufactured and tested in consideration of

DIN EN 50191 Erection and operation of electrical test equipment

DIN EN 61010-01 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, con-
trol, and laboratory use; Part 1: General requirements
DIN EN 61010-31 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, con-
trol, and laboratory use; Part 31: Safety requirements for hand-held
probe assemblies for electrical measurement and test and correspond
to the relevant requirements of the technical safety.
DIN EN 60270 High-voltage test techniques - Partial discharge measurement (IEC
60270) and correspond to the relevant requirements of the technical
safety.

The regulations of the DIN EN 50191:2001 Installation and Operating of Electrical Test Units as
well as the given safety requirements have to be kept conscientious!

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

3
Introduction

This document contains the user manual for the PDD and OHV Suite software. In Section 3.1 the
contents and structure for all chapters in this document are summarized. If specialized informa-
tion are required, it is possible to directly read only the relevant portions of this document (see
Section 3.2 for details).

3.1 Structure of this manual

The manual contains 10 chapters followed by an appendix with 6 additional chapters. The first
Chapter 1 contains general information about the safety rules for the PDD and all applications
using the PDD. Every user must conscientiously read this chapter and apply the states rules at
all times.
In Chapter 2 relevant standards and further references to related material is given. Chapter 4 gives
an overview over the available PDD product types and a detailed description of the hardware. A
Quickstart guide is provided in Chapter 5 to give a short introduction into the software operation.
Additionally a trouble shooting guide is available inside this section. Finally, in Chapter 6 the
OHV Suite software is described in greater detail, including available user interface options and
elements specialist for the PDD usage.

3.2 Advice how to read this manual

This manual is structured to give all users of the OHV Suite software a concise and direct reading
experience. Although it is possible to read all chapters linearly, it is also possible to skip some
sections when specific information are required. Based on the background of the user, some
chapters may be more relevant to the user. For a new user of the Ohv software it is recommended
to start reading the general description of the software (cf. Chapter A), followed by the detailed
description of the OHV Suite software (cf. Chapter 6). Users which have experiences with the
Ohv software structure can start with a more detailed description (see Chapter 6). When previous
measurement knowledge with the OHV Suite software exists, it may be sufficient to read the
Section 5 for performing a measurement or calibration. Section 5.3 should be read if there are any
problems during measurement or calibration.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

4
Application and Specification

The PDD partial discharge detector is intended for stand alone operations in laboratory envi-
ronments or direct integration in HV test systems. The device provides multi-channel PD mea-
surements and test voltage synchronization. There are different types of the device which are
described in Table 4.1. The series identification string for each devices is needed when operating
devices through the Remote API.

Name Description Device image Series

The PDD-2 device contains two input

PDD-2 channels for PD and one synchroniza- pd
tion channel for the test voltage

The PDD-2/D device contains two in-

put channels for PD and one synchro-
PDD-2/D nization channel for the test voltage. pd
Additionally an embedded LCD display
is available for displaying measured val-
ues.

The PDD-2/UHF device contains one

PDD-2/UHF input channel for UHF and one syn- pd
chronization channel for the test volt-
age.

The PDD-3-Display device contains

multiple input channels for PD and syn-
PDD-3-Display chronization channel for the test volt- pd
age. Additionally a display is available
for controlling the device.

The PDD-3 device contains multiple in-

PDD-3 put channels for PD and synchroniza- pd
tion channel for the test voltage.

Table 4.1: Available PDD configurations

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page 6 of 102

Depending on the PDD configuration different front plates are available (cf. Figure 4.1).

PDD-2/D UP
Partial Discharge Detector
FUNCTION

POWER

OK
DOWN

PDD-2
Partial Discharge Detector

POWER

PD1 PD2/GATING SYNC GND

0
1
115-230 V 50/60 Hz, FUSE 0.6 A/T

Figure 4.1: PDD device front and rear view

The PDD-2/UHF version comes with a different housing. The controls for this version are all
visible on the front plate inside the case (cf. Figure 4.2).

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

Mains TV
0
1

PDD-2 / UHF
Figure 4.2: PDD-2/UHF opened view

Depending on the PDD-3 configuration a display and an USP port is available (cf. Figure 4.3).

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page 7 of 102

PDD-3 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 SYNC

TV1 TV2 TV3 TV4 TV5 TV6

PDD-3 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 SYNC

TV1 TV2 TV3 TV4 TV5 TV6

Figure 4.3: PDD-3/PDD-3-Display opened view

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION PDD-2 Page 8 of 102

4.1 Technical Specification PDD-2

The following table provides the technical details for the electrical PDD-2 variants.

Specification PDD

Device parameter

External power supply 115-230 VAC ± 5% (50 Hz/60 Hz)

Maximum input current 0.6 A
Main fuse 630 mA, Speed T, Size 5∗20, Breaking capacity: high

Protection level IP20

Environment Indoor use only

Maximum altitude 2000 m

Relative humidity 90 % non condensing
Operating temperature 5 °C to 40 °C
Cooling mode Active fan cooling

Physical dimensions (W x H x D) 450 mm x 88 mm x 315 mm

Weight approx. 3100 g

Turn-on time 30 s

Electrical parameter

Minimum detectable apparent charge 0.2 pC

Selectable input attenuation from 0 dB to 66 dB (with 6 dB steps)1

Selectable input amplification from 0 dB to 30 dB (with 6 dB steps)1

Band width (1) IEC

(2) Wide band
(3) No filter

Single pulse detection < 10 ns

Single pulse resolution > 50 kHz repetition rate (deviation < 10 %)

Partial Discharge

Input impedance 50 Ω
Input frequency range from 10 kHz to 20 MHz1

Maximum input voltage 50 VRM S

Input protection Against over-voltage and short-circuit

Synchronization Voltage

Input impedance 1 MΩ
Input frequency from DC to 300 Hz1

Maximum input voltage 50 VRM S

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION PDD-2/UHF Page 9 of 102

4.2 Technical Specification PDD-2/UHF

The following table provides the technical details for the PDD-2/UHF variant.

Specification PDD

Device parameter

External power supply 115-230 VAC ± 5% (50 Hz/60 Hz)

Maximum input current 0.6 A
Main fuse 630 mA, Speed T, Size 5∗20, Breaking capacity: high

Protection level IP67 (with case closed)

IP20 (case opened)

Environment Indoor and outdoor use

Maximum altitude 2000 m

Relative humidity 90 % non condensing
Operating temperature 5 °C to 40 °C
Cooling mode Active fan cooling

Physical dimensions (W x H x D) 530 mm x 324 mm x 323 mm

Weight approx. 8000 g

Turn-on time 30 s

Electrical parameter

Minimum detectable U peak 1 mV

Selectable input attenuation 6 dB or 26 dB

Selectable input amplification from 0 dB to 30 dB (with 6 dB steps)1

Band width UHF from 50 MHz to 2000 MHz

UHF measurement

Input impedance 50 Ω

Maximum input voltage 5 VRM S

Synchronization Voltage

Input impedance 1 MΩ
Input frequency from DC to 300 Hz1

Maximum input voltage 50 VRM S

1 This functionality depends on the device configuration

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION PDD-3-DISPLAY Page 10 of 102

4.3 Technical Specification PDD-3-Display

The following table provides the technical details for the PDD-3-Display variant.

Specification PDD

Device parameter

External power supply 115-230 VAC ± 5% (50 Hz/60 Hz)

Maximum input current 0.6 A
Main fuse 630 mA, Speed T, Size 5∗20, Breaking capacity: high

Protection level IP67 (with case closed)

IP20 (case opened)

Environment Indoor and outdoor use

Maximum altitude 2000 m

Relative humidity 90 % non condensing
Operating temperature 5 °C to 40 °C
Cooling mode Active fan cooling

Physical dimensions (W x H x D) 503 mm x 406 mm x 193 mm

Weight approx. 9000 g

Additional 1000 g for battery option

Turn-on time 30 s

Electrical parameter

Minimum detectable U peak 1 mV

Selectable input attenuation from 0 dB to 66 dB (with 6 dB steps)1

Selectable input amplification from 0 dB to 30 dB (with 6 dB steps)1

Band width UHF from 50 MHz to 2000 MHz

UHF measurement

Input impedance 50 Ω

Maximum input voltage 5 VRM S

Synchronization Voltage

Input impedance 1 MΩ
Input frequency from DC to 300 Hz1

Maximum input voltage 50 VRM S

1 This functionality depends on the device configuration

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION PDD-3 Page 11 of 102

4.4 Technical Specification PDD-3

The following table provides the technical details for the PDD-3 variant.

Specification PDD

Device parameter

External power supply 115-230 VAC ± 5% (50 Hz/60 Hz)

Maximum input current 0.6 A
Main fuse 630 mA, Speed T, Size 5∗20, Breaking capacity: high

Protection level IP67 (with case closed)

IP20 (case opened)

Environment Indoor and outdoor use

Maximum altitude 2000 m

Relative humidity 90 % non condensing
Operating temperature 5 °C to 40 °C
Cooling mode Active fan cooling

Physical dimensions (W x H x D) 503 mm x 406 mm x 193 mm

Weight approx. 7500 g

Additional 1000 g for battery option
Additional 1500 g for display option

Turn-on time 30 s

Electrical parameter

Minimum detectable U peak 1 mV

Selectable input attenuation from 0 dB to 66 dB (with 6 dB steps)1

Selectable input amplification from 0 dB to 30 dB (with 6 dB steps)1

Band width UHF from 50 MHz to 2000 MHz

UHF measurement

Input impedance 50 Ω

Maximum input voltage 5 VRM S

Synchronization Voltage

Input impedance 1 MΩ
Input frequency from DC to 300 Hz1

Maximum input voltage 50 VRM S

1 This functionality depends on the device configuration

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.5. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Page 12 of 102

4.5 Software requirements

This section describes (cf. Table 4.2) the minimum requirements for PC or Laptop hardware on
which the OHV Suite should be run.

Description Minimum requirement

RAM 2 GB

Display resolution 1366 x 768 Pixel

Free hard drive space 1 GB

Operating System Windows 7 (64bit) or Windows 10 (64bit)

Table 4.2: Software requirements

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.6. OPERATING ELEMENTS Page 13 of 102

4.6 Operating Elements

The PDD-2/D has an additional display and operating elements on the front plate. The front plate
elements are used to control the measurement operation. All signal input and output connectors
are located at the rear plate.

PDD-2/D UP
Partial Discharge Detector 3 FUNCTION

POWER

4 OK 5
DOWN
1 2

Figure 4.4: PDD-2/D front operating elements overview

Number Element Description

1 LCD Black and White LCD display with background lighting

2 UP / DOWN Push buttons for up and down commands

3 FUNCTION Push button for function selection

4 OK Push button for operation confirmation

5 POWER Green LED indicates that the device is switched on

Table 4.3: PDD-2/D front operation elements description

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.6. OPERATING ELEMENTS Page 14 of 102

PD1 PD2/GATING SYNC GND

5 6

0
1
1 2 3 4 115-230 V 50/60 Hz, FUSE 0.6 A/T

Figure 4.5: PDD-2 and PDD-2/D rear connectors overview

Number Element Description

1 ETHERNET RJ-45 Ethernet connector

2 PD1 BNC connector for PD input

3 PD2/GATING BNC connector for PD or gating input1

4 SYNC BNC connector for synchronization voltage input

5 GND Connector for electrical grounding

6 PWR Connector for Operating voltage and On / Off switch

1 Availability depends on the device configuration

Table 4.4: PDD-2 and PDD-2/D rear operating elements description

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.6. OPERATING ELEMENTS Page 15 of 102

4 IN 1

IN 2
2
IN 3
1
IN 4

6 7 8
5 Mains TV 3
0
1

PDD-2 / UHF
Figure 4.6: PDD-2 and PDD-2/UHF connectors overview

Number Element Description

1 ETHERNET RJ-45 Ethernet connector

2 IN 1-4 BNC connector for PD/UHF input1

3 TV BNC connector for synchronization voltage input1

4 GND Connector for electrical grounding

5 MAINS Connector for Operating voltage and On / Off switch for

systems without battery

6 On / Off switch for systems with battery1

7 Shows the operating mode1

8 Shows the battery status1

1 Availability depends on the device configuration

Table 4.5: PDD-2 and PDD-2/UHF connector description

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.6. OPERATING ELEMENTS Page 16 of 102

PDD-3 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 SYNC

3 4
TV1 TV2 TV3 TV4 TV5 TV6

5
9

Figure 4.7: PDD-3 and PDD-3-Display connectors overview

Number Element Description

1 IN 1-6 BNC connector for PD/UHF input1

2 TV 1-6 BNC connector for synchronization voltage input1

3 SYNC

4 GND Connector for electrical grounding

5 MAINS Connector for Operating voltage

6 ETHERNET RJ-45 Ethernet connector

7 USB port1

8 On / Off switch

9 Display1

1 Availability depends on the device configuration

Table 4.6: PDD-3 and PDD-3-Display connector description

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.7. THEORY OF OPERATION Page 17 of 102

4.7 Theory of Operation

As mentioned above the PD measuring system PDD is especially designed for PD measurements
according to the international standard IEC Publication 60270. The development bases on long
term experience in wide-band PD measuring technique.

Z
Z
Ck
U~ Ca C0
Zm PDD-X
Ck
CD-X G
U~ Cs CD-X
Ca
Zm PDD-X

C-X
Z

Ca
CD-X
U~ Ck Z
Zm PDD-X
C0

G
U~ Cs Ck
Z Ca

CD-X
Ca Ca1(Ck) C-X Zm PDD-X
U~
Zm + -
Zm1

BCD-1

PDD-X

(a) PD measuring circuits I (b) PD measuring circuits II

Figure 4.8: Basic PD measuring circuits

In order to complete the recommended different PD measuring circuits (see Figure 4.8), the fol-
lowing units are also available on request:

bridge impedance BCD-1, which is especially designed for PD detection on the basis of the
balanced bridge, which is evident from Figure 4.8.
battery-powered PD calibrator C-1, which is intended for the direct calibration of the com-
plete PD measuring circuit with charge magnitudes up to 500 pC.
measuring impedance CD-1 or CD-2 for the decoupling of the PD current pulses on the
PD coupling capacitor and changing in equivalent voltage pulses and forwarding to the PD
detector according IEC 60270

For more information see the relevant instruction manuals of these units. The main field of
application of the PDD are on one hand PD acceptance tests of HV equipment according to the
international standards and on the other hand service measuring and PD studies on HV insulation
in research and development. Because the PDD is easy to handle, it is also recommended for
training and education purposes. In the following basic PD measuring circuits recommended by the
international standard IEC 60270 are showing the principle connection of the available equipment,
as the PD detector PDD the measuring impedance CD-1 or CD-2, the bridge impedance BCD-1
and the calibrator C-1.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
4.7. THEORY OF OPERATION Page 18 of 102

From the PD measuring circuit decoupled current pulses are converted by the measuring impedance
CD-1 or CD-2 (Figure 4.8) into equivalent voltage pulses. Those are characterized on one hand
by extremely short time parameters in the ns range, and on the other hand by very low voltage
magnitudes down to the µV range. If, for instance, an apparent charge of 0.1 pC shall be detected,
then the corresponding voltage magnitude is about 100 µV, if a time constant of 50 ns for the PD
pulse is assumed and the effective measuring impedance corresponds to 50 Ohm. External noises,
however, may exceed essentially this signal level. Therefore, sensitive PD measurements can be
carried out only in electromagnetically well shielded test laboratories. The main task of each PD
measuring system and so of the PDD consists in the amplification of the PD pulses, picked up
by the measuring impedance, and its quasi-integration in order to obtain the main PD quantity
apparent charge. In order to quantify the detected PD pulses, the complete PD measuring circuit
has to be calibrated. For this is for example the battery-powered calibrator C-1 available.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

5
Quickstart Guide

This chapter gives a short introduction into the main aspects of handling the PDD and using the
OHV Suite software. Section 5.1 describes how a measurement can be performed. In Section 5.2
a brief overview is given how to calibrate the PDD. The third section provides solutions and
explanations for some common situations when using the PDD device.

5.1 Performing a measurement

This section details how a measurement is performed. A measurement refers to the process where
the PDD device is used for partial discharge detection and evaluation. Prior to the actual measure-
ment is is mandatory that the PDD device is connected correctly to the test object (cf. Section 4.7
and Section 1.1). When the device starts, the input attenuation is set to its maximum attenuation
(input protection during initialization). Once the PDD is started it will automatically start the
measurement. The device implements logic to automatically select the most appropriate input
attenuation. As a factory default, the device automatically adjusts the attenuation according to
the current input signal level (see Section 6.4.2 for details regarding this behavior). Partial dis-
charge events and the apparent charge value (QIEC ) are continuously detected and calculated. If
the device is not calibrated, no apparent charge value is displayed. In this case the measurement
value is displayed as p.u. instead of Coulomb. Additionally, the phase resolved data view (cf.
Section 6.6) provides visualized PD pulses and the PRPDA diagram. After connecting the PDD
to the test object it is required to calibrate the measurement circuit. How to perform a calibration
is described in Section 5.2.

5.2 Performing a calibration

The test circuit needs to be calibrated for performing measurements according to IEC 60270:2000.
Additionally, reproducible measurements are only possible with a calibrated measurement circuit.

It is important to calibrate the PDD when a new measurement circuit is used

for PD measurements. If a different calibration is used, the apparent charge
readings are invalid.

The OHV Suite provides a convenient user interface to calibrate the test circuit (see Section 6.5).
The calibration for apparent charge and test voltage can be performed individually. Each calibra-
tion resets the current calibration and tries to asses the current input signal automatically. The
PDD devices does not any information about the actual test circuit in use. If a calibration process
is running the Reset button allows to abort the process. The Reset button can also be used to
clear any existing calibration.

5.2.1 PD calibration
The PD calibration is required to calculate the appropriate scaling factor from the measured voltage
levels to the corresponding discharge level. In order to calculate this factor a reference charge

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.3. TROUBLE SHOOTING Page 20 of 102

pulse can be inserted into the PDD device through the testing circuit. The received voltage levels
are received through the PDD device and together with the user provided reference charge level
the conversion factor is automatically calculated. The whole process of connecting the reference
calibrator to the test circuit, feeding the calibration pulses into the PDD and the calculation of
the conversion factor is called PD calibration. It is recommended to check for proper attenuation
of the inserted pulses prior to the calibration. Inside the Overview display the auto range mode
should be set to Full. Inside the Pulses view (cf. Section 6.6) the pulses from the calibrator
should be displayed. If the pulses can be seen with a good signal to noise ratio the calibration
process can be started. The selected charge level of the calibrator must be inserted into the edit
field of the calibration input. The calibration is then started by pressing the Calibrate button.
The calibration process is automatically performed and when the calibration is finished a status
is shown. Table 5.1 provides an overview for the available status information.

Status Description

calibrated The calibration was successful. The displayed conversion

factor is shown.

NOT calibrated The calibration could not be performed. Refer to Sec-

tion 5.3 for information how to solve calibration issues.

currently running A calibration is currently running. Use the Reset button

to abort the running process.

Table 5.1: Calibration status overview

5.2.2 TV calibration
The TV channel calibration is used for calibrating the measurement impedance output voltage
signal to the actual high voltage signal of the test object. It is not necessary to select a specific
saturation for the signal, because the TV channel is always selecting the best attenuation automat-
ically. The calibration of the TV channel is performed inside the calibration view. The calibration
is started by pressing the Calibrate button. The calibration process is automatically performed
and when the calibration is finished a status is shown. Table 5.1 provides an overview for the
available status information.

5.3 Trouble shooting

This section provides solutions to common questions when a calibration or measurement is per-
formed. Each section details one specific situation and provides one or more detailed solutions to
resolve the issue.

5.3.1 No measurement values displayed

The PDD measures and displays all measurement values automatically. If the apparent charge,
voltage or frequency values are not changing in the Overview display, please check the following:

1 In the Device overview the acquisition should be started, the channel must be enabled and
the evaluation must be active
2 In the Overview display the evaluation must be active for the selected channel

3 The correct channel is selected. The PDD provides multiple channels and only the channel
with actual input data may display any values.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.3. TROUBLE SHOOTING Page 21 of 102

For the acquisition in the Device overview it is required to press the Start acquisition button.
When the button is marked with a red background the acquisition of the device is running. The
evaluation for each channel can be started separately through clicking the Start evaluation button
inside the Overview display. If channel evaluation is enabled the button is marked with a red
background and the respective Evaluation active LED is green.

5.3.2 Calibration failed

This section provides some reasons and counter measures to resolve common calibration issues.
The most common causes for a failed calibration are:

1 The channel input attenuation is not optimal and a too low saturation is measured.

2 Invalid calibrator input signal

3 Too high noise level from the measurement circuit

When applying any of the following hints a new calibration should be per-
formed.

Proposal: Check channel saturation

The saturation of the channel which should be calibrated must have a good signal to noise ratio
(cf. Image 5.1b). For a too small ratio between the signal (orange line in Figure 5.1a) and the
noise (red line in Figure 5.1a) switch into the Overview display and check the auto range setting.
Figure 5.2 depicted invalid auto range mode and saturation. Change the auto range mode to Full
auto range. With these settings the PDD device will change the attenuation automatically if the
signal is too low or too high. The Pulses view inside the Phase resolved data view can help to
check if the signal to noise ratio is good. If the auto range mode does not help to find a good
ratio the gain of the channel can be changed manually by using the or buttons to adjust the
attenuation value of the channel.

Proposal: Check input signal

If no successful calibration can be performed with changed gain adjustments, it maybe possible
to increase the injected charge level. When the calibrator is switched to the highest signal output
and no calibration possible, the batteries of the calibrator should be checked.

Proposal: Check noise level

Another potential problem comes with high noise level values (Figure 5.1a display a bad signal-
noise ratio). A high noise level may origin from within the measurement circuit or from external
source. To check if the noise level is coming from the test object or external sources, the calibrator
should be connected directly to the respective PD input channel (cf. Figure 4.5 marked with 2
and 3 ). If the calibration is working correctly with the signal directly fed into the input channel,
the measured disturbances are coming from the test object or an external source. In that case the
grounding should be checked.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
5.3. TROUBLE SHOOTING Page 22 of 102

(a) Bad signal to noise ratio

(b) Good signal to noise ratio

Figure 5.1: Bad and good input signal levels

Figure 5.2: Wrong attenuation example

Sensitive PD measurements can be carried out only in electromagnetically well

shielded test laboratories. It is preferred to perform any sensitive measurements
only when a very low noise signal level can be guaranteed.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

6
Partial discharge software description

This chapter describes the general usage of the PDD software. Inside this section a general software
overview is not contained, therefore the Chapter A.1 should be read.
The following sections contains the description of the different software part for the PDD device.
The sections are structured as followed. Section 6.1 describes the available configuration options.
In section 6.3 the different control elements will be described. After the general control element
description the overall software parts will be depicted.
On the left side all available sub parts of the PDD software can be selected and will be shown on
the right side. The default sub application of the PDD software is the Device overview. All parts
of the PDD Software are described in detail inside the following sections.

Figure 6.1: General software overview

Depending on the different PDD configuration the following figures can be

differ. In each section where control elements are available depending on the
PDD configuration it is mentioned there.

6.1 PDD configuration options

This section contains the description of the PDD configuration options. There are four main
configuration options available for the device. The first contains the recording options (cf. 6.1.1).
The second contains the reporting options (cf. 6.1.2). The third option is for the measurement
option (cf. 6.1.3) and the last contains the options for displaying measurement data (cf. 6.1.4). In
Figure 6.2 all available options are marked and will be described inside the next sections.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.1. PDD CONFIGURATION OPTIONS Page 24 of 102

Figure 6.2: Recording and reporting configuration overview

6.1.1 Recording options

The following paragraphs describe the different options which are available for the recording during
the measurement. In later sections the information are referenced to these options.

Data folder selection

Each recording will be saved to the data folder which can be selected with the Select Data Folder
button ( 1 ). If a folder was selected, a new button will appear, as seen in Figure 6.3. It’s function is
to reset the selected folder to the default one, which is C:\Users\Public\Documents\ohv diagnostic
GmbH\PD Measurements in Windows Vista and higher.

Figure 6.3: Reset button

File name template

The scheme of the name of the file the recordings will be saved to can be modified too. This setting
can be found in the file template section ( 2 in Figure 6.2). The buttons will activate the related
template parts. If activated Device Type will add the type of the device (for example PDD) to the
file name, while the button Serial Number will add the serial number, Date and Time the current
date and time in ISO format and User defined allows the user to add specific data to the template.

Additional settings
Additional settings can be set in the related part ( 3 in Figure 6.2) in the configuration menu.
To start recording when the measurement starts, select Start record when measurement starts.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.2. DEVICE OVERVIEW Page 25 of 102

If you want to manually specify the recording size or duration or want to enter a comment for
each recording, select the appropriate settings. Valid recording sizes are entered in Bytes with SI-
prefixes, for example 30MB will produce a recording with the size of 30 Mega Bytes. An example
for a time specification is 200s which will result in a recording taken over 200 seconds.

6.1.2 Reporting options

The reporting options ( 4 in Figure 6.2) contains all available options for the reporting. If the
check box Ignore diagram modifications for report generation is enabled, the diagrams for the
report are generated as new instances. If this option is not enabled the diagrams for the report
will be used as in the software depicted. The diagrams contains then all modifications of zooming
and all other options of the diagrams.

6.1.3 Measurement options

The measurement settings ( 5 in Figure 6.2) allows to configure default behaviors to device and
channel settings during the measurement. The option allows to synchronize the layout selection
when a new channel will be activate for the measurement.

6.1.4 Display options

The display settings ( 6 and 7 in Figure 6.2) allows to configure default behaviors for display
measured data. 6 allows to select the value types which should be displayed as the default for
the signal and voltage channels. With the selections marked with 7 the bipolar scaling for all
diagrams could be enabled.

6.2 Device overview

The Device overview shows all information of the PDD which is currently running. In Figure 6.4
all relevant information are marked with 1 up to 3 and will be described inside this section.

1 3

Figure 6.4: Device overview

1 displays an image of the PDD device which is currently used for the PD measurement. De-
pending on the device type the image can be different. For details about the different device types
see Table 4.1 in Chapter 4. 2 contains the general information of the device itself and allows
to start or stop the acquisition. On the top of this section the serial number of the device, the
available channels and the CPU temperature are depicted. Also there are the software version,
the FPGA version and in the brackets the operation system version of the device. The button
Disconnect from the device allows to close the connection and the views for the currently used
device.
Depending on the PDD configuration the number of channels can differ. On the bottom of sec-
tion 3 is a button for enabling and disabling the acquisition for the channel. 3 contains the
information if channels are enabled and activated. Only for enabled channels PD data will be
collected.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. GENERAL CONTROL ELEMENTS Page 26 of 102

Analyzed values are only available for a channel when the data acquisition and
evaluation is enabled for this channel.

6.3 General control elements

This section describes the general control elements which are available inside the next sections.
These control elements will be described here and will be referenced in later sections.

6.3.1 Device control elements

The device controls are located on the left side of the application. This main menu are available if
the connection to an online device is established or an existing replay file is successfully open. The
sub section Online device describes the available elements for a online device and section Offline
device describes the available elements for offline device.
The following device controls are identical for the online (Figure 6.5a) and offline (Figure 6.5b)
devices. The Overview will display the overview page of the device, the description of the view
can be found in Section 6.4. The Calibration opens the calibration view (cf. Section 6.5). Phase
Resolved Data depicted the diagram which contains the data with the phase resolution (cf. Sec-
tion 6.6). The last device control which available for both types of connection is the Time Resolved
Data (cf. Section 6.8).

(a) Online device (b) Offline device

elements elements
Figure 6.5: Available device control elements

Online device
Additional to the general device control elements the online device can contain the Gating which
is described in Section 6.9 and the Fault location (cf. Section 6.11). Both of these elements are
only available if the device supports the functionality of gating and / or gating. Otherwise these
control elements are not visible for a device.

Offline device
The offline device has additionally the control element of the Replay Overview. The functionality
of this view is described inside Section 6.14.

6.3.2 Channel control elements

The channels contains several control elements to switch between the different channels and to
enable or disable the channel. The number of the channels are defined through the supported
channels of the device.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. GENERAL CONTROL ELEMENTS Page 27 of 102

A PDD device can have more than one channel. For selection of which channel the measured data
are showed one button for each available channel.
Figure 6.6 depicted the buttons for all available input channel. By clicking on the button the the
channel can be activated or deactivated. If the channel is activated the button will be green, if the
channel is deactivated the button is gray.

Figure 6.6: Enable / disable single channel

For switching between the different channel on the bottom of each available view all available
channels shown which are available for the device (cf. Figure 6.7). By clicking to one of these
button the selected channel will be shown. This element is only available if more than one channel
is available.

Figure 6.7: Switch between channels

6.3.3 Measurement and recording control elements

This section describes the control elements which are available for start / stopping the measurement
and recording. In Figure 6.8) the two buttons for controlling the measurement and recording
function could be seen. On click the Measurement button will either start or stop the measurement,
depending on the state of the measurement. The button Start recording will start the recording
and change into Stop recording.

Figure 6.8: No recording active

For starting the recording the button Start recording must be clicked. Depending on your con-
figuration (see Section 6.1.1) a additional dialog will be shown on start of the recording, as seen
in Figure 6.9, which provides fields for the desired data. Additional fields will be provided for
entering data for the user defined fields.

Figure 6.9: Recording dialog

After a recording was started it can enter two states. A brief description of each state and the
icon belonging to it, can be found in Table 6.1.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.3. GENERAL CONTROL ELEMENTS Page 28 of 102

Icon Description

This icon indicates that the software is recording.

This icon indicates that the recording is finished and is safe to the chosen
location.

Table 6.1: Recording states

6.3.4 Replay control elements

This section describes the replay controls which are only available for offline devices. In Figure 6.10
all available control elements for the replay are depicted. The button Start replay ( 1 ) are used to
start the replay, after starting this button is changed into Stop replay. The element marked with
2 in Figure 6.10 can be used to select the speed for the replay. The available speeds are described
in Table 6.2. The current progress of the replay can be seen in the progress bar marked with 3
in Figure 6.10. Therefore the current time and the end of the replay file are shown as text values
and the progress bar contains the progress as a visualization.

1 2 3

Figure 6.10: Replay control elements

Speed Description

0.1x speed The replay speed is 10 times slower as the real measurement.

0.5x speed The replay speed is 2 times slower as the real measurement.

1.0x speed The replay speed the same like in the real measurement.

1.5x speed The replay speed is 1.5 times faster as the real measurement.

2.0x speed The replay speed is 2 times faster as the real measurement.

5.0x speed The replay speed is 5 times faster as the real measurement.

10.0x speed The replay speed is 10 times faster as the real measurement.

As fast as possible The replay will be shown as fast as possible on the used laptop or PC.

Table 6.2: Available replay speed

The real replay speed depends on the power of the machine where the
OHV Suite is installed and can be differ between multiple computers!

6.3.5 Reporting control elements

The reporting is available for online and offline devices. The following table contains the available
supported reporting types which can be selected by pressing the down arrow on the button.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.4. OVERVIEW DISPLAY Page 29 of 102

Report Type Description

Word Generating a word report will produce a file with the file extension (*.docx).

Csv Generating a csv report will produce a file the extension (*.csv).

Json Generating a json report will produce a file the extension (*.json).

Table 6.3: Available report types

If a word report should be generated, several templates are available for the creation of a Word
report. In the middle of section 2 in Figure 6.11 the template used for the Word report can be
selected from the selection box. The selection box contains all templates which are located inside
the provided report template folder. The selection of the template is automatically saved within
the application. When the Word report generation is first used after application start, the selection
will be initialized with the template best fitting to the language settings of the application.

1 2

Figure 6.11: Reporting control elements

For the generation of a report the button Generate <Report Type> ( 1 ) is used. After successful
report generation (cf. Figure 6.12), the file name under which the generated report was saved ( 3 )
and two additional buttons ( 4 ) will be shown. The button Open Report opens the generated
report file with the default application associated with the file extension. When clicking the
button Show in Explorer the Windows Explorer will be used to display the content of the folder
where the generated file is located.

3 4

Figure 6.12: Reporting finished

6.4 Overview display

The Overview display shows all information for one channel of the PDD. In Figure 6.13 the
relevant information are highlighted with 1 to 3 .

6.4.1 Measurement values

1 displays all relevant measurement values of one input channel for the PDD. The displayed
values for the PDD include the apparent charge value, the frequency of the synchronization input
voltage and the synchronization voltage value itself. The apparent charge value is depicted in
p.u. if no calibration for the channel is available otherwise the value is depicted in Coulomb. The
device will automatically select an appropriate SI-Prefix for the charge value when a calibration is
available. Besides showing the charge value as QIEC and the RMS voltage value, the application
also supports displaying the peak value for each value. To toggle between these values, right click
the areas which are highlighted in green and blue, respective to the value you want to change, as
seen in Figure 6.13. If you only want to toggle between the displayed values, click the green area.
If you want to take further settings regarding the display of the actually measured value, click the
blue area. Figure 6.14 shows example menus for the display of the voltage value. Their border
color indicate where to click for each menu. As it can be seen, the menu shown in Figure 6.14a is
a sub menu of the one shown in Figure 6.14b.
The frequency ( 1 in Figure 6.13) is shown gray if the measured frequency is unknown or invalid
( 1 and 2 in Figure 6.15). The frequency is only shown black if the measured frequency is valid
( 3 in Figure 6.15), that means the program has found a consistent frequency in the measurement.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.4. OVERVIEW DISPLAY Page 30 of 102

2 3

Figure 6.13: Channel overview

(a) Menu of text

label (b) Menu of numeric label
Figure 6.14: Example menus for voltage.

If no test voltage is available (which is also displayed as an invalid frequency) a frequency of 20 Hz

is simulated.

3 2

Figure 6.15: Frequency states

When using an UHF device, the view will slightly differ. Instead of charge values the UHF values
will be displayed. The switching between average and peak UHF values still works the same way
as described before. Table 6.4 lists all available toggle options depending on the connected device.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.4. OVERVIEW DISPLAY Page 31 of 102

Value type Detailed description

The peak charge magnitude with a repetition frequency of 10 pulses
Qm
per second or higher

QIEC The apparent charge according to IEC60270

QM AX The highest charge value within the measurement

QP eak The highest charge value within a period

Voltage (RMS) The current voltage (RMS value)

Voltage (Peak) The current peak voltage

Table 6.4: Possible values to toggle

6.4.2 Channel controls

2 in Figure 6.13 depicts the different controls for the each channel. On the left side, the auto
range mode and the attenuation for the PD channel can be modified. Additionally, the attenuation
of the TV channel is contained on the left side.

Autorange mode
Allows to modify the auto range mode for the PD channel. The different modes switches the PD
channel gain either automatically or not depending on the input signals for this channel. The
following modes are available for a PD channel:

Full means the gain value is adapted into both directions. Switching to a higher at-
tenuation if the input signal is to high and to a lower attenuation if the signal is
to low.
Semi means the gain value is adapted to lower gain values if the signal input is to high.
This will protect the hardware for damage. The system will never select a higher
gain value (lower attenuation) by itself in this mode.
No means the gain value is never adapted depending on the signal input. The user
must switch between the different gain values and manually increase or decrease
the attenuation.

Filter selection
Allows to modify the filter setting for the input signal. The filter settings are only available for
electrical signal channels, if the channel is a UHF channel this element is not available. The
following filters can be chosen:

IEC is a band-pass filter according IEC 60270.

Wideband is a low-pass filter.
No no filtering is applied to the input signal and all frequencies are passed.

After changing the filter you should perform a new calibration.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.4. OVERVIEW DISPLAY Page 32 of 102

Channel gain
The PD channel gain modifies the attenuation of the current PD channel. The buttons and
can be used to decrease and increase the attenuation. Between these two buttons the current
selected attenuation value is depicted in dB.

Changes to the PD channel gain are influenced by the current selected auto
range mode.

TV channel gain modifies the attenuation of the TV channel. The buttons and can be
used to decrease and increase the attenuation. Between these two buttons the current selected
attenuation value is depicted in dB. The device has only one TV channel but each channel gain
page allows to modify the TV channel attenuation.

The TV channel has always full auto range mode set.

Attenuation
On the left side of the information frame the current attenuation of the PD and TV channel is
depicted. Additionally for the PD channel the current auto range mode is displayed.

TV channel synchronization
The TV channel synchronization is optional and not supported for all devices. If the device
supports different synchronization type it will be displayed and can be selected inside the selection
box.

Internal synchronization The voltage is synchronized to the mains of the device.

External synchronization The voltage is synchronized to the TV channel input or to The PD
channel which is measured (only if the PD channel has a internal splitter).

6.4.3 Status information

3 contains the information about the current status. In the information frame the current status of
the evaluation and calibration is shown. Additionally for calibrated channels the current calibration
factor is depicted.

Calibration
In the information frame there are two buttons to switch into the calibration view of the channel.
Depending on the current calibration status the caption of each button is switched between Perform
and Show.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.5. CALIBRATION VIEW Page 33 of 102

6.5 Calibration view

This section describes the calibration elements. Figure 6.16 shows the available information of
the calibration. The calibration contains an input field ( 1 ) which defines the target value for the
calibration. One input field corresponds to the input channel which should be calibrated. For a PD
channel the input field requires the charge value which is used as input for the calibration. For the
TV channel the input requires a voltage input. Each of the input fields can be filled with SI-prefix
values of the expected unit. Below each channel input field 2 the current status information for
the calibration status of the channel is depicted. On the right side of the calibration view ( 3 ) the
buttons Calibrate and Reset are used to start a calibration or reset the current calibration. The
Reset button can also be used to stop a running calibration process.

1
2
3
1
2

Figure 6.16: Calibration overview

6.5.1 Manual calibration

The check box Enable manual calibration allows to show and hide the manual calibration inputs
(cf. Figure 6.17). The manual calibration allows to modify the values for Tau 1 and Tau 2.
Additionally the manual calibration factors could be set for the PD and TV channel. It is also
possible to set a phase shift which is applied during the evaluation of the data.
The buttons Set calibration factor is used to set a manual calibration factor for the PD or TV
channel. With button Set phase shift the inserted phase shift which should be applied to the
evaluation are set. The button Set values allows to apply the changed values of Tau 1 and Tau 2.
With button Reset to default both value will be reset to the default values (Tau 1 is 0.44 and Tau
2 is 0.5).

Figure 6.17: Manual calibration elements

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.6. PHASE RESOLVED DATA VIEW Page 34 of 102

6.6 Phase resolved data view

This section gives an overview of the available phase resolved diagrams. The basic structure of the
different phase resolved diagrams is identical. In Figure 6.18 the main parts are highlighted. Area
1 contains the current measurement values. Details about this part can be found in Section 6.4.1.
In 2 switching between the available diagram views is possible. Button Pulses allows switching
to the pulses diagram, elliptic pulses diagram and the PRPDA button switches to the PRPDA
diagram. 3 contains the respective data of the selected diagram. Details for each diagram type
are described in Sections 6.6.1, 6.6.3 and 6.6.4. Windowing mode can be activated by clicking
the check box near 4 . For details regarding windowing see section 6.6.2. All other controls are
explained in previous sections and are not discussed further here.

Figure 6.18: Phase resolved data container

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.6. PHASE RESOLVED DATA VIEW Page 35 of 102

6.6.1 Pulses view

The pulses diagram displays the phase resolved partial discharge events (Figure 6.19). The pulses
diagram displays one single period at time. With the found PD events shown with phase and
amplitude information. The PD events are depicted as sticks.

This diagrams does not display each measured period. Periods are shown with
a fixed frequency. Although not all periods are shown, the device will still
process all PD event continuously and consistently.

Figure 6.19: Pulses diagram

With the button Reset Trigger Level it is possible to reset the trigger level to 0. The level itself
can be controlled by dragging the trigger level line (white line) to a another position.

6.6.2 Windowing
Enabling windowing allows to access further GUI-elements, as shown in Figure 6.20. Windowing
allows to exclude specific values from being evaluated and displayed. To do this, the software
allows to specify this windows in the table marked with 2 . To add or remove new windows, the
buttons on the right side of the table can be used. In the area marked with 3 contains those
buttons and additionally a button to remove all windows. After adding a new window, it’s values
can be specified by altering the values in the table. After adding a new window, it will be displayed
in the diagram as a rectangle. Besides changing values in the table, the software also allows to
resize the windows by dragging a corner or side of the respective rectangle. Whole rectangles can
be moved via dragging by using the key combination shift and left-mouse button.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.6. PHASE RESOLVED DATA VIEW Page 36 of 102

2 3

Figure 6.20: Windowing settings

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.6. PHASE RESOLVED DATA VIEW Page 37 of 102

6.6.3 Elliptic Pulses view

The elliptic pulses diagram displays the phase resolved partial discharge events (Figure 6.21) as an
elliptic curve. The diagram displays one single period at time. With the found PD events shown
with phase and amplitude information. The PD events are depicted as sticks.

This diagrams does not display each measured period. Periods are shown with
a fixed frequency. Although not all periods are shown, the device will still
process all PD event continuously and consistently.

For the elliptic curve there is no possibility to change the trigger level of the detected pulses, this
must be performed inside the pulse view directly. Also the zooming functionality is disabled for
this view.
The axis scaling on the signal axis is used as the maximum allowed displayed pulse height on the
elliptic curve. The values above the maximum scale will be cut directly at this point. The signal
height up to the maximum axis scaling is show on each position inside the elliptic curve.

Figure 6.21: EllipticPulses diagram

6.6.4 PRPDA view

The PRPDA diagram displays the measured PD events vs. the phase angle together with color
coded information about the rate at which the PD events occur for a certain PD level and phase
angle range. On the right upper corner the button Clear ( 2 ) allows to clear the PRPDA diagram
data. Above the PRPDA diagram ( 3 ) is a small additional diagram called Overflow ( 1 ). This
diagram contains all events which could not be included into the PRPDA diagram as their charge
value is above the selected maximum scale of the PRPDA diagram instance. These values will also
be shown depending on the phase angle and the event repetition rate.

Changing the PRPDA diagram charge axis scaling will automatically clear the
diagram contents.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.6. PHASE RESOLVED DATA VIEW Page 38 of 102

1
2

Figure 6.22: PRPDA diagram

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.7. STATISTIC DATA VIEW Page 39 of 102

6.7 Statistic data view

The statistic data view contains the HNQ diagram and the HNQ time based diagram ( 1 )

6.7.1 HNQ diagram

The HNQ diagram shows the partial discharge rates over the partial discharge value ( 6 ). This
view contains the input for the maximum HNQ value ( 2 ), the input for the bucket interval ( 3 ),
a button to apply the HNQ value and bucket interval ( 4 ). Pressing the button ( 5 ) will clear the
diagram. Partial discharge values are accumulated according to the defined buckets. Within each
bucket the pulse rate (number of pulses per second) is calculated and displayed as the diagram
content. The highest bucket shown in the diagram is not the HNQ value defined with ( 2 ) but
the actual highest PD values recorded.

1
2 3 4 5

Figure 6.23: HNQ diagram

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.7. STATISTIC DATA VIEW Page 40 of 102

6.7.2 HNQ time based diagram

The HNQ time based diagram is mainly the same as the HNQ diagram expect it is split in intervals
with the interval time manually set ( 7 ). 8 displays the total HNQ pulses form the start or the
last clear of the measurement to the current time of the measurement. 10 is selected by default
and shows the latest element with the interval time as a progress bar (Figure 6.25). 9 and 11
are only usable after deselecting the Auto button ( 10 ). With this two buttons you can switch
between the last 15 interval elements of the measurement.

1
2 3 7 4 5

9 10 11

Figure 6.24: HNQ time based diagram

Figure 6.25: HNQ time based interval progression

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.8. TIME RESOLVED DATA VIEW Page 41 of 102

6.8 Time resolved data view

This section describes the different types of available time resolved data diagrams. The structure
of this view contains the selection of the different time resolved diagrams ( 1 ) and the diagram
itself ( 2 ). The available diagrams are called the Qt/Ut, the QU, the Qm and the Pulse counter
diagram. If a new measurement is started the displayed diagrams are emptied. For clearing the
diagrams during the measurement the button Clear all diagrams can be used. Details about the
diagrams are depicted in the following sections.

Figure 6.26: Time resolved Qt/Ut diagram

6.8.1 Qt/Ut diagram

The Qt/Ut diagram displays the Qiec charge values and the voltage values over the time. Fig-
ure 6.27 shows an example of this diagram type.

Figure 6.27: Qt/Ut diagram

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.8. TIME RESOLVED DATA VIEW Page 42 of 102

6.8.2 QU diagram
The QU diagram displays the Qiec charge values over voltage values. Figure 6.28 shows an example
of this diagram type.

Figure 6.28: QU diagram

6.8.3 Qm diagram
The Qm diagram displays the Qm charge values over voltage values. Figure 6.29 shows an example
of this diagram type.

Figure 6.29: Qm diagram

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.8. TIME RESOLVED DATA VIEW Page 43 of 102

6.8.4 Pulse counter diagram

The Pulse counter diagram displays the sum of the pulses every 1/10/30 and 60 seconds.

Figure 6.30: Pulse counter diagram

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.9. GATING Page 44 of 102

6.9 Gating
In this view gating settings can be adjusted. Signals colored green are signals received from the
signal input, while red colored signals are received from the gating input. White colored pulses
originate from the gating input and will not be displayed if the gating is activated. Figure 6.31
shows the view with gating deactivated. To enable or activate gating, chose the respective option
from the menu near 1 . With 3 the gating hold time can be adjusted. Results of the chosen
settings will be displayed in a diagram at 2 . These settings will also take effect on which values
are displayed in the pulse diagram (see 6.6.1).

3
Figure 6.31: Calibration of fault location

Figures 6.32b and 6.33b show how the pulses diagram is effected when setting the gating activity
to either enabled or activated.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.9. GATING Page 45 of 102

(a) Gating Enabled

(b) Pulse diagram with gating enabled.

Figure 6.32: Results of enabling gating

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.9. GATING Page 46 of 102

(a) Gating activated

(b) Pulse diagram with gating activated

Figure 6.33: Results of activating gating

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.10. OVERVIEW OF ALL CHANNELS Page 47 of 102

6.10 Overview of all Channels

In this section the "All channels" view will be explained. An example view can be seen in Fig-
ure 6.34. The "All Channels" view provides an interface to view the measurement of all channels.
For parallel evaluation of channels, which support this feature, the buttons with the channel names
can be used to either activate or deactivate the evaluation (cf. 1 ) of the given parallel channel.
In contrast to parallel channels, only one multiplexed channel can be evaluated at a time. The
results of the active channels measurements will then be displayed in the diagram section of the
interface (cf. 2 ). Only the diagrams of active channels will be updated.

Figure 6.34: Viewing all channels

For each channel the displayed diagram can be chosen to either be a pattern (cf. 6.6.4), a pulses
view (cf. 6.6.1) or the elliptic pulse view. Figure 6.35 shows an example view of a channel’s
diagram. For switching between views, the buttons denoted with 1 can be used. Switching to a
view requires clicking the button with the respective icon.

Figure 6.35: Single diagram with view selection

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.11. FAULT LOCATION Page 48 of 102

6.11 Fault Location

Fault location allows to locate faults. The first step to do so, is to run a calibration. After that,
the actual measurement can be done. The following sections will describe these steps in detail.

6.11.1 Calibration
Figure 6.36 shows the calibration elements. At 1 a drop box is shown which allows to toggle
between calibration a measurement. next to this drop box, a button is located to start or stop
measurements. When a calibration or measurement is performed, it’s progress will be indicated
by ther blue circle next to the button. In the are marked with 2 cable parameters can be entered
for calibration. Disabling wavelet filterign can be done near 3 . The diagram marked with 4 will
visualize reflections. In Figure 6.36 an example diagram after calibration is shown.

1 2 3

Figure 6.36: Calibration of fault location

6.11.2 Measurement
Most of the UI elements are similar as explained in Section 6.11.1. Only elements which differ
will be further explain in this section. Figure 6.37 shows an example after an measurement was
performed. The diagram marked by 2 is the same as seen in the calibration part. Additional to
this another diagram is displayed in 3 . This diagram visualizes faults found by the measurement
on a specific location. To clear this diagram the button "Clear Location Mapping" near 1 can be
used.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.11. FAULT LOCATION Page 49 of 102

Figure 6.37: Running a fault location measurement

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.12. VLF MEASUREMENTS Page 50 of 102

6.12 VLF measurements

The VLF measurement is an optional measurement type that has no configuration. The VLF
measurement is automatically detected and measures the test voltage from 0.01 Hz up to 3 Hz in
10 mHz steps.

6.12.1 Disabled functions during VLF

If a VLF measurement is detected the pulse view diagram and the QU diagram are automatically
disabled.

6.12.2 Changed diagram during VLF

Inside the pattern diagram the red line ( 1 ) is available and shows the current position in the
voltage curve.

Figure 6.38: Phase resolved VLF data pattern

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.13. OPENING RECORDED MEASUREMENTS Page 51 of 102

6.13 Opening recorded measurements

This section describes the user interface to open recorded measurements. The structure of the user
interface can be seen in Figure 6.39.

2 3

Figure 6.39: User interface to open recorded measurements

The user interface to locate and open existing measurement is shown, when the button Test Browser
(cf. 1 ) is clicked. On the left portion of the screen the local machine can be navigated to locate
existing measurements (cf. area 2 ). The buttons to navigate to the parent folder, the default stor-
age folder, Home folder or Desktop folder are provided for convenient navigation. Opening a sub
folder can be achieved through double-clicking a folder within the list of existing measurements (cf.
area 2 ). Once a valid PD measurement is selected, the measurement is opened and an overview
is shown (see area 3 ). This overview provides details about the measurement and can be used to
properly select the desired file. Once a measurement should be analyzed, clicking the Open this file
for analysis button will load the file an show the control interface explained in the previous sections.

The PDD software contains the file support to open TDMS and LXD files. The opening of these
files requires a separate license which can be purchased through ohv diagnostic GmbHİf the license
is not activated an information about missing license is shown (c.f. Figure 6.40 marked with 3 ).
Inside the information about missing replay support a link is available which allows to switch to
the Package activation page of the OHV Suite application. Details how to get the activation for
such a package is described inside Section A.2.1.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.13. OPENING RECORDED MEASUREMENTS Page 52 of 102

Figure 6.40: User interface to open recorded measurements

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.14. REPLAY OVERVIEW Page 53 of 102

6.14 Replay overview

This section describes the replay overview element which is only available for offline devices. Inside
this view a rough overview are shown how the live measurement was performed. Figure 6.41
shows the elements for the view. The Qt/Ut diagram in the left side ( 1 ) are shown the history
during the live measurement. 2 display the measurement details. In the area 3 information of
pattern (cf. Figure 6.42) and actions (cf. Figure 6.43) are depicted which are saved during the
live measurement. For the selection of the pattern preview the orange rectangles inside the Qt/Ut
diagram can be selected. The selected information are shown inside 2 of Figure 6.42. The actions
can be selected by clicking to the green rectangles inside the Qt/Ut diagram. The selected actions
are shown inside 2 in Figure 6.43. The progress during a running replay will be displayed inside
the Qt/Ut diagram with a orange range band ( 1 in Figure 6.44).

Figure 6.41: Replay overview

Figure 6.42: Pattern preview information

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
6.14. REPLAY OVERVIEW Page 54 of 102

Figure 6.43: Action preview information

Figure 6.44: Replay overview with progress

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

7
Word report template

This section describes the creation of customized Word report templates. Section 7.1 contains
the description where to find the existing templates and how to create a new one. Section 7.3
documents all available key words which can be used to fill the report with data. Using the word
reporting requires the python scripting functionality, which is contained inside the OHV Suite and
will be installed automatically. The word template can contain plausibility checks for the data
which are inserted into the report. A syntax description for the definition of custom templates
with examples can be found in Section 7.2

The translations of the report content must be done manually. The values of
the report will never contain any translations.

7.1 Word report template

The OHV Suite brings it’s own default Word templates which can be used for the report gener-
ation. These templates will be copied into the public documents folder under: ’ohv diagnostic
GmbH/Report Templates’. Template file names have the following structure:

TYPE_report_template_LANGUAGE.docx.

TYPE is the type of the report template. Currently only pd is available.

LANGUAGE is the language code which is supported through the OHV Suite.

If you want to create your own report templates, it is highly recommended to copy an existing
template and save it under a different file name in the same location as the default templates. The
default templates may be changed or extended in future OHV Suite versions, which can lead to
conflicts with changed templates saved under the name of a default template, ultimately bringing
the risk that your changes will be overridden when the application updates it’s default templates.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.2. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE SYNTAX Page 56 of 102

7.2 Word report template syntax

Report templates are word documents with the exception, that they contain placeholders for
the report data. This section briefly explains the usage of these placeholders. Placeholders are
automatically replaced by the OHV Suite application during report generation. Only placeholders
with a correct syntax are replaced. The correct syntax and usage for placeholders is important.

7.2.1 Basic placeholder usage

Placeholders start with two curly brackets and end with two closing curly brackets. Enclosed
by the two pairs of curly brackets, the identifier/name of the placeholder is given. An example
with the resulting replacement can be seen below in Figure 7.1. As it can be seen, the identifier
and the surrounding brackets should be separated by spaces. Also notice, that the formatting of
the placeholder was inherited by the result. In general, if the placeholder text is formatted in a
special way, the text replacing it will inherit the formatting. If the placeholder is to be replaced
by a picture, the picture will at least inherit the layout formatting, e.g. when the placeholder
is centered, the picture will be too. In the example, the placeholder MyTextPlaceholder is
replaced by text and MyImagePlaceholder with an picture.

Figure 7.1: Basic Placeholder example

7.2.2 Basic statement usage

Placeholders of the form {% Statement %} are so called statements. Technically they aren’t
placeholders but used to control the output when processing a template. For example, statements
can be used to replace placeholders only under certain conditions or to generate tables with dynamic
row count. Statements will be executed and always removed during report generation.

Placeholders of the form {{ Placeholder }} will be replaced with content.

Statements of the form {% Statement %} will not be part of the output but
will be executed while processing the template.

7.2.3 Conditional statements - If statement

This subsection describes how to use conditional statements and how to check if placeholders
contain plausible data. Listing 7.1 shows an example of conditional placeholder usage. The first
example starts on line number 1. The example show how to check if a placeholder was defined.
This is done by using the if statement follow by the placeholder name. Only if the condition is
fulfilled, the resulting document will contain the text in line 3, e.g. when the placeholder in the
example is defined. Only if the condition is not fulfilled, the text after the else will be part of
the resulting document. Each if has to be ended with an endif statement, as shown. Only text
enclosed by the if and endif statements will be affected by the condition checking. The else
path is optional as can be seen in the example starting in line number 9. This example shows
how to check a placeholder for a special value, in this case it is compared to an empty character

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.3. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE CONTENT Page 57 of 102

1 This is an example.
2 {% if condition %}
3 Condition is fulfilled!
4 {% else %}
5 Condition is not fulfilled!
6 {% endif %}
7 This text will not be affected by the condition.
8
9 This is an example with nested placeholders and comparison.
10 {% if condition != "" %}
11 Condition is not empty and contains {{ condition }}
12 {% endif %}

Listing 7.1: Example of conditional placeholders

string and the condition is only fulfilled, if the placeholder contains some text. As seen in line
11 placeholders can be nested. The example only adds the text in line 11 and the text, that the
placeholder condition contains, only if the placeholder contains text. All report placeholders of
type Boolean can be used for conditional statements automatically. Numeric values can be used as
conditional statements in combination with numerical comparison operators. String values can be
used for conditional statements when used together with comparison operators (see Listing 7.1).

7.2.4 Filling template tables - for statement

This subsection will explain how to create templates for tables and how they are filled with data.
Figure 7.2 shows an example table definition and the result. Let’s assume we have a list of data we
want to process and display in table form. The list contains cities and each city has a name and a
postcode. In the example we process a list containing two entries [Dresden, 01127] and [Dresden,
01069]. For each list element there is a placeholder name and code defined. A third placeholder
city_list is defined which refers to our list of cities. The template now defines a header row,
which will not be affected. The next row uses statement consisting of tr to create a new table row
and the for statement, which will be used to iterate through the elements of the list city_list
refers to. In this case city is no placeholder and is simply used to refer to the current element
of the list. In the next row city.name and city.code are placeholders used to access data
behind name and code of the current city. To end the row, the statement {% tr endfor %} is
used. Please note that this will only work with lists of elements.

Figure 7.2: Template table example

7.3 Word report template content

This section describes the existing keys which can be used inside the word report templates. These
keys can be used as placeholder inside the template document and will be replaced with the content
from the reporting. In Section 7.3.1 all available keys which can be used inside a report template
are listed together with a brief description and what can be expected to be returned, when using
them.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.3. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE CONTENT Page 58 of 102

7.3.1 Word report template key for report templates

Table 7.1 contains all available keys which can be used inside report template.

Key Type Description

Contains the report id starting with ’PD’

pd_report_id String and a increased report counter with 3 dig-
its.
Contains the current date of the report cre-
pd_report_date_locale String
ation.
Contains the current time of the report cre-
pd_report_time_locale String
ation.
Contains the current date of the report cre-
pd_report_date_iso String ation as ISO formatted date string in for-
mat ’yyyy-MM-dd’.
Contains the current time of the report cre-
pd_report_time_iso String ation as ISO formatted time string in for-
mat ’hh:mm:ss’.
Contains the absolute minimum signal
pd_absolute_minimum_signal_value String
value as formatted string with unit.1
Contains the absolute maximum signal
pd_absolute_maximum_signal_value String
value as formatted string with unit.1
The absolute maximum value of all nega-
pd_absolute_negative_maximum_signalDouble
tive peaks.1
The absolute maximum value of all positive
pd_absolute_positive_maximum_signal Double
peaks.1
Contains the last measured Qiec value as
pd_current_qiec_value String
formatted string with unit.2
Contains the maximum Qiec value as for-
pd_maximum_qiec_value String
matted string with unit.1
Contains the minimum Qm value as for-
pd_minimum_qm_value String
matted string with unit.1
Contains the maximum Qm value as for-
pd_maximum_qm_value String
matted string with unit.1
Contains the last measured Qm value as
pd_current_qm_value String
formatted string with unit.2
Contains the total number of negative sig-
pd_negative_peak_count_value Integer
nal events. 1
Contains the total number of positive sig-
pd_positive_peak_count_value Integer
nal events. 1
Contains the pulse rate as formatted string
pd_pulse_rate_value String
with the unit 1//s (one per second).
Contains the duration of the measurement
pd_pulse_rate_duration_value String
as formatted string.
Contains the serial number of the used PD
pd_serial_number String
device.
Contains a flag if a external voltage source
pd_is_synced Boolean is used for the synchronization and a signal
was available.
Contains the frequency value as formatted
pd_measurement_frequency String
string with unit.

Continued on next page

1 Value is calculated between start of measurement until the report is created.
2 Value is measured directly before the report is created.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
7.3. WORD REPORT TEMPLATE CONTENT Page 59 of 102

Table 7.1 – Continued from previous page

Key Type Description

Contains the voltage RMS value as format-

pd_measurement_voltage_rms String
ted string with unit.
Contains the voltage PEAK value as for-
pd_measurement_voltage_peak String
matted string with unit.
Contains the channel name for which the
pd_channel_name String
report is created.
The frequency ranges for the filtering of
pd_frequency_ranges String
signal input.
pd_is_pd_calibrated Boolean Flag if the signal channel is calibrated.
The calibration factor for the signal chan-
pd_calibration_factor_pd String
nel.
pd_is_tv_calibrated Boolean Flag if the voltage channel is calibrated.
The calibration factor for the voltage chan-
pd_calibration_factor_tv String
nel.
The software name which was used for the
pd_module_name String
creation of the report.
The software version which was used for
pd_software_version String
the creation of the report.
Contains the version of the FPGA which is
pd_device_fpga_version String
running on the device.
Contains the software version which is run-
pd_device_software_version String
ning on the device.
Contains the image of the PRPDA dia-
pd_prpda_data Image
gram.
Contains the image of the signal over time
pd_st_ut_data Image
and voltage over time diagram.
Contains the image of the signal over volt-
pd_su_data Image
age diagram.
pd_hnq_data Image Contains the image of the HNQ diagram.
Contains the image of the HNQ interval
pd_hnq_interval_data Image
diagram.
Contains the image of the Qm over time
pd_qm_data Image
diagram.
Contains the image of the pulse count dia-
pd_pulse_count_data Image
gram.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

8
CSV report

This section describes the content of the report generated as a CSV (Comma separated values) file.
The data inside the file are containing the separators of the selected local inside the OHV Suite.

8.1 General description

The separator between the values is specified as ; (semicolon). The file itself is separated into
different sections which contains a comment (starting with #), followed by the header (description
of the column) and the data behind this header. The following sections will describe the different
parts of the file and contains a description of the data.

8.2 Section description

The file contains a file version which allows to check how the data must be parsed. Maybe the
structure is changed in the future. The changes between the different versions will described in
later sections.

8.2.1 Description for file version 1

The following section contains the description for data inside the file version 1 (one).

Header data
The header data contains the general information of the recorded data. In Table 8.1 contained
data are described.

Key Description
Contains the file version of the CSV file, which defines the struc-
csv_file_version
ture inside the file.
Contains the current date of the report creation as ISO format-
pd_report_date_iso
ted date string in format ’yyyy-MM-dd’.
Contains the current time of the report creation as ISO format-
pd_report_time_iso
ted time string in format ’hh:mm:ss’.
pd_serial_number Contains the serial number of the used PD device.
The software version which was used for the creation of the
pd_software_version
report.
Contains the version of the FPGA which is running on the de-
pd_device_fpga_version
vice.
pd_device_software_version Contains the software version which is running on the device.
pd_channel_name Contains the channel name for which the report is created.
pd_module_name The software name which was used for the creation of the report.
Table 8.1: CSV header data

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.2. SECTION DESCRIPTION Page 61 of 102

Calibration data
The calibration data contains relevant data of the calibration. The Table 8.2 describes the con-
tained data.

Key Description
pd_is_pd_calibrated Flag if the signal channel is calibrated (yes or no).
pd_calibration_factor_pd The calibration factor for the signal channel.
pd_is_tv_calibrated Flag if the voltage channel is calibrated (yes or no).
pd_calibration_factor_tv The calibration factor for the voltage channel.
Table 8.2: CSV calibration data

Configuration data for file version 1

The configuration data contains the data of general information about the configuration of the
pattern data. In Table 8.3 the contained data are described.

Key Description
Contains the duration how long the pattern data are collected.
pd_pattern_duration
The unit is seconds.
pd_pattern_dim_x Contains the x dimension of the pattern data (number of pixels).
pd_pattern_dim_y Contains the y dimension of the pattern data (number of pixels).
Contains the x resolution of the pattern data (resolution of one
pd_pattern_res_x
pixel).
Contains the y resolution of the pattern data (resolution of one
pd_pattern_res_y
pixel).
Contains the flag if the pattern data are collected bipolar (yes
pd_pattern_bipolar
or no).
Contains the information how the data inside the pattern are
pd_pattern_axis_scaling
scaled (linear or logarithmic).
Table 8.3: CSV configuration data

Counter values
The counter values contains the values which are counted during the measurement. The Table 8.4
contains the counted data description.

Key Description
pd_negative_peak_count_value Contains the total number of negative signal events.
pd_positive_peak_count_value Contains the total number of positive signal events.
Table 8.4: CSV counter values

Scalar values
The scalar values contains the values which are calculated during the measurement. The Table 8.5
contains the scalar data description.

Scalar units
The scalar units contains the units of the defined values. The names of the scalar values contains
the string _unit at the end to specify each unit of the scalar value and will be depicted inside
Table 8.6. The data type for every unit value is text.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.2. SECTION DESCRIPTION Page 62 of 102

Key Type Description

Contains the absolute minimum signal
pd_absolute_minimum_signal_value Double
value.
Contains the absolute maximum signal
pd_absolute_maximum_signal_value Double
value.
The absolute maximum value of all neg-
pd_absolute_negative_maximum_signal Double
ative peaks.
The absolute maximum value of all pos-
pd_absolute_positive_maximum_signal Double
itive peaks.
pd_maximum_qiec_value Double Contains the maximum Qiec value.
pd_current_qiec_value Double Contains the last measured Qiec value.
pd_minimum_qm_value Double Contains the minimum Qm value.
pd_maximum_qm_value Double Contains the maximum Qm value.
pd_current_qm_value Double Contains the last measured Qm value.
pd_pulse_rate_value Double Contains the pulse rate in 1s .
Contains the duration of the measure-
pd_pulse_rate_duration_value Double
ment in seconds.
pd_measurement_frequency Double Contains the frequency value.
pd_measurement_voltage_rms Double Contains the voltage RMS value.
pd_measurement_voltage_peak Double Contains the voltage PEAK value.
Table 8.5: CSV scalar values

Key Description
Contains the unit of the absolute mini-
pd_absolute_minimum_signal_value_unit
mum signal value.
Contains the unit of absolute maximum
pd_absolute_maximum_signal_value_unit
signal value.
The unit for the absolute maximum
pd_absolute_negative_maximum_signal_unit
value of all negative peaks.
The unit for the absolute maximum
pd_absolute_positive_maximum_signal_unit
value of all positive peaks.
Contains the unit of maximum Qiec
pd_maximum_qiec_value_unit
value.
Contains the unit of last measured
pd_current_qiec_value_unit
Qiec.
Contains the unit of minimum Qm
pd_minimum_qm_value_unit
value.
Contains the unit of maximum Qm
pd_maximum_qm_value_unit
value.
Contains the unit of last measured Qm
pd_current_qm_value_unit
value.
pd_pulse_rate_value_unit Contains the unit of pulse rate.
Contains the unit of the measurement
pd_pulse_rate_duration_value_unit
duration.
pd_measurement_frequency_unit Contains the unit of frequency value.
pd_measurement_voltage_rms_unit Contains the unit of voltage RMS value.
Contains the unit of voltage PEAK
pd_measurement_voltage_peak_unit
value.
Table 8.6: CSV scalar units

Diagram data for pattern and pattern overflow elements

The pattern elements contains the data which are added to the pattern diagram or pattern overflow
diagram. Each line after the description contains one definition for a single pixel inside the diagram
image of pattern and pattern overflow. Only data are contained for counters greater than zero.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
8.2. SECTION DESCRIPTION Page 63 of 102

The Table 8.7 contains the description which values are contained inside the section.

Key Description
Contains the index inside the pattern diagram of the x dimen-
phase_index sions (the range is from zero to pd_pattern_dim_x - 1 from the
configuration data).
Contains the index inside the pattern diagram of the y dimen-
signal_index sions (the range is from zero to pd_pattern_dim_y - 1 from the
configuration data).
Contains the number of events which are counted inside the
counter
selected pixel.
Table 8.7: CSV pattern elements

Data for time resolved diagrams

The elements contains the data which are added to time resolved diagrams. Each line after the
description contains one time point added to the diagrams. The Table 8.8 contains the description
which values are contained inside the section.

Key Description
Contains the time value in milli seconds (ms) when a new point
time
is added to the diagram.
Contains the voltage value in kilo volts (kV) when a new point
voltage
is added to the diagram.
Contains the signal value when a new point is added to the
signal_qiec diagram. Depending on the type of channel and calibration
state the value is pC, p.u. or mV.
Contains the Qm value when a new point is added to the dia-
signal_qm gram. Depending on the type of channel and calibration state
the value is pC, p.u. or mV.
Contains the signal peak value when a new point is added to
signal_peak the diagram. Depending on the type of channel and calibration
state the value is pC, p.u. or mV.
Table 8.8: CSV data for time resolved diagrams

Data HNQ diagram

The elements contains the data which are added to HNQ diagram. Each line after the descrip-
tion contains a range inside the HNQ diagram with the pulse rate. The Table 8.9 contains the
description which values are contained inside the section.

Key Description
Contains the start of the bucket inside the HNQ. Depending on
signal_range_start the type of channel and calibration state the value is pC, p.u.
or mV.
Contains the end value of the bucket inside the HNQ. Depending
signal_range_end on the type of channel and calibration state the value is pC, p.u.
or mV.
Contains the pulse rate for the defined bucket in pulses per sec-
pulse_rate
ond.
Table 8.9: CSV data HNQ diagram

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

9
JSON report

This section describes the content of the report generated as a JSON (JavaScript Object Notation)
file. Details about the syntax of a JSON file can be read under the following link www.json.org.

9.1 General description

The different parts inside the JSON are separated through JSON objects where the value are
contained as JSON values. The data types will be described inside the documentation of each
value. Independent of the contained data type it is possible to have the value null can be contained
as the JSON value which means there is no value available (null value).

9.2 Section description

The file contains a file version which allows to check how the data must be parsed. Maybe the
structure is changed in the future. The changes between the different versions will described in
later sections.

9.2.1 Description for file version 1

The following section contains the description for data inside the file version 1 (one).

Header data
The header data object contains the general information of the recorded data. In Table 9.1 the
different JSON objects with there value data types are depicted.

Calibration data
The calibration data object contains relevant information of the calibration. The Table 9.2 contains
the JSON objects with there value data types.

Configuration data for file version 1

The configuration object data contains the data of general information about the configuration
of the pattern data. In Table 9.3 the JSON object keys with there contained data and types are
described.

Counter values
The counter values contains the values which are counted during the measurement. The Table 9.4
contains the counted data JSON object keys with there data types.

Scalar values
The scalar values contains the values which are calculated during the measurement. The Table 9.5
contains the JSON objects with the scalar data type description.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.2. SECTION DESCRIPTION Page 65 of 102

Key Type Description

Contains the file version of the JSON file, which
json_file_version Integer
defines the structure inside the file.
Contains the current date of the report creation
pd_report_date_iso String as ISO formatted date string in format ’yyyy-
MM-dd’.
Contains the current time of the report cre-
pd_report_time_iso String ation as ISO formatted time string in format
’hh:mm:ss’.
pd_serial_number String Contains the serial number of the used PD device.
The software version which was used for the cre-
pd_software_version String
ation of the report.
Contains the version of the FPGA which is run-
pd_device_fpga_version String
ning on the device.
Contains the software version which is running on
pd_device_software_version String
the device.
Contains the channel name for which the report
pd_channel_name String
is created.
The software name which was used for the cre-
pd_module_name String
ation of the report.
Table 9.1: JSON header data

Key Type Description

pd_is_pd_calibrated String Flag if the signal channel is calibrated (yes or no).
pd_calibration_factor_pd Double The calibration factor for the signal channel.
Flag if the voltage channel is calibrated (yes or
pd_is_tv_calibrated String
no).
pd_calibration_factor_tv Double The calibration factor for the voltage channel.
Table 9.2: JSON calibration data

Key Type Description

Contains the duration how long the pattern data
pd_pattern_duration Double
are collected. The unit is seconds.
Contains the x dimension of the pattern data
pd_pattern_dim_x Double
(number of pixels).
Contains the y dimension of the pattern data
pd_pattern_dim_y Double
(number of pixels).
Contains the x resolution of the pattern data (res-
pd_pattern_res_x Double
olution of one pixel).
Contains the y resolution of the pattern data (res-
pd_pattern_res_y Double
olution of one pixel).
Contains the flag if the pattern data are collected
pd_pattern_bipolar String
bipolar (yes or no).
Contains the information how the data inside the
pd_pattern_axis_scaling String
pattern are scaled (linear or logarithmic).
Table 9.3: JSON configuration data

Scalar units
The scalar units contains the units of the defined values. The names of the scalar values contains
the string _unit at the end to specify each unit of the scalar value and will be depicted inside
Table 9.6. The data type for every unit value is text.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.2. SECTION DESCRIPTION Page 66 of 102

Key Type Description

Contains the total number of negative signal
pd_negative_peak_count_value Integer
events.
Contains the total number of positive signal
pd_positive_peak_count_value Integer
events.
Table 9.4: JSON counter values

Key Type Description

Contains the absolute minimum signal
pd_absolute_minimum_signal_value Double
value.
Contains the absolute maximum signal
pd_absolute_maximum_signal_value Double
value.
The absolute maximum value of all neg-
pd_absolute_negative_maximum_signal Double
ative peaks.
The absolute maximum value of all pos-
pd_absolute_positive_maximum_signal Double
itive peaks.
pd_maximum_qiec_value Double Contains the maximum Qiec value.
pd_current_qiec_value Double Contains the last measured Qiec value.
pd_minimum_qm_value Double Contains the minimum Qm value.
pd_maximum_qm_value Double Contains the maximum Qm value.
pd_current_qm_value Double Contains the last measured Qm value.
pd_pulse_rate_value Double Contains the pulse rate in 1s .
Contains the duration of the measure-
pd_pulse_rate_duration_value Double
ment in seconds.
pd_measurement_frequency Double Contains the frequency value.
pd_measurement_voltage_rms Double Contains the voltage RMS value.
pd_measurement_voltage_peak Double Contains the voltage PEAK value.
Table 9.5: JSON scalar values

Vector data
The JSON object vectors contains the values which are available for diagram data. The different
diagram types will be described inside the next paragraphs. The data inside each type are JSON
array with defined data types which will be named for each paragraph itself. The array data inside
one diagram type contains the same number of values for each array.

Diagram data for pattern and pattern overflow elements The data for pattern is available
under the JSON object pd_patter_elements and pattern overflow data is available under the JSON
object pd_patter_overflow. The JSON keys for the data are described inside the Table 9.7. The
array data contains only data where the counter is greater than zero.

Data for time resolved diagrams is available under the JSON object pd_qtut_elements. The
JSON keys for the data are described inside the Table 9.8. The array data contains one time point
added to the diagrams.

Data HNQ diagram is available under the JSON object pd_hnq_elements. The JSON keys
for the data are described inside the Table 9.9.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.2. SECTION DESCRIPTION Page 67 of 102

Key Description
Contains the unit of the absolute mini-
pd_absolute_minimum_signal_value_unit
mum signal value.
Contains the unit of absolute maximum
pd_absolute_maximum_signal_value_unit
signal value.
The unit for the absolute maximum
pd_absolute_negative_maximum_signal_unit
value of all negative peaks.
The unit for the absolute maximum
pd_absolute_positive_maximum_signal_unit
value of all positive peaks.
Contains the unit of maximum Qiec
pd_maximum_qiec_value_unit
value.
Contains the unit of last measured
pd_current_qiec_value_unit
Qiec.
Contains the unit of minimum Qm
pd_minimum_qm_value_unit
value.
Contains the unit of maximum Qm
pd_maximum_qm_value_unit
value.
Contains the unit of last measured Qm
pd_current_qm_value_unit
value.
pd_pulse_rate_value_unit Contains the unit of pulse rate.
Contains the unit of the measurement
pd_pulse_rate_duration_value_unit
duration.
pd_measurement_frequency_unit Contains the unit of frequency value.
pd_measurement_voltage_rms_unit Contains the unit of voltage RMS value.
Contains the unit of voltage PEAK
pd_measurement_voltage_peak_unit
value.
Table 9.6: JSON scalar units

Key Type Description

Contains the index inside the pattern diagram
of the x dimensions (the range is from zero to
phase_index Integer
pd_pattern_dim_x - 1 from the configuration
data).
Contains the index inside the pattern diagram
of the y dimensions (the range is from zero to
signal_index Integer
pd_pattern_dim_y - 1 from the configuration
data).
Contains the number of events which are counted
counter Integer
inside the selected pixel.
Table 9.7: JSON pattern elements

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
9.2. SECTION DESCRIPTION Page 68 of 102

Key Type Description

Contains the time value in milli seconds (ms)
time Double
when a new point is added to the diagram.
Contains the voltage value in kilo volts (kV) when
voltage Double
a new point is added to the diagram.
Contains the signal value when a new point is
added to the diagram. Depending on the type of
signal_qiec Double
channel and calibration state the value is pC, p.u.
or mV.
Contains the Qm value when a new point is added
signal_qm Double to the diagram. Depending on the type of channel
and calibration state the value is pC, p.u. or mV.
Contains the signal peak value when a new point
is added to the diagram. Depending on the type
signal_peak Double
of channel and calibration state the value is pC,
p.u. or mV.
Table 9.8: JSON data for time resolved diagrams

Key Type Description

Contains the start of the bucket inside the HNQ.
signal_range_start Double Depending on the type of channel and calibration
state the value is pC, p.u. or mV.
Contains the end value of the bucket inside the
signal_range_end Double HNQ. Depending on the type of channel and cal-
ibration state the value is pC, p.u. or mV.
Contains the pulse rate for the defined bucket in
pulse_rate Double
pulses per second.
Table 9.9: JSON data HNQ diagram

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Chapter

10
Remote API

This section documents the Remote-API used to control the OHV Suite software through a defined
API. This functionality must be separately licensed (see Section A.2.1 for details).

10.1 Remote API configuration

For using the Remote-API it is required to configure the interface how to get the data. The
checkbox Enable Remote API server (cf. 1 in Figure 10.1) allows to activate or deactivate the
Remote-API functionality. For enabled functionality it is possible to specify the IP Address which
should be used for listening of the server. The Server port specifies which port should be used by
the server for listening. The button Save Settings (cf. 3 in Figure 10.1) will store the settings of
the Remote-API.

With the server IP address 0.0.0.0 the server can be configured to listen on all
available network interfaces.

Figure 10.1: Remote API configuration

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Page 70 of 102

10.2 Technical description

The Remote-API is provided as a http server which can be accessed through any client capable of
issuing http requests. The server provides read and write functionality which are directly mapped
to GET and POST http methods. Every information is mapped to a specific URL, called endpoint
in the following sections.

Once the Remote-API functionality is available certain generic information and some PDD spe-
cific information can be retrieved and manipulated. This documentation covers the Remote-API
version 1.

10.2.1 Remote-API URL structure

Every URL for a specific Remote-API endpoint contains six (6) elements (cf. Image 10.2). Three
elements are fixed and three elements are dynamic .

http:// <IP> : <PORT> / <ENDPOINT>

Figure 10.2: Remote-API endpoint URL structure

http:// The endpoint addressing scheme is always http

: The separator between the IP-address and the port

/ The separator between the port and the endpoint

<IP> The IP address where the Remote-API server is listening

<PORT> The port where the Remote-API server is listening

<ENDPOINT> The endpoint to access

10.2.2 Access to endpoints

A single endpoint is provided to read or write data through the Remote-API. When reading data a
http GET request is sent to the URL for the given endpoint. The Remote-API server will respond
with a http response containing the requested data. The specific content type which is returned
depends on the endpoint. Each specific endpoint documents the returned content type. When
writing data to an endpoint the http POST method must be used. For write requests the data is
encoded as parameters which are passed as part of the endpoint string for the http URL.

10.2.3 Read data from an endpoint

Read from a Remote-API endpoint is performed through http GET requests. The return status
code defines the result of the read operation:

200 The read request could be handled. The content contains the requested informa-
tion.
404 The requested element could not be found. This error is specific to the requested
endpoint.

In case of an error response the Remote-API returns data as application/json, containing a single
error key with the http status code as its value.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 71 of 102

10.2.4 Write data from to endpoint

Writing to an Remote-API endpoint is performed through http POST requests. The return status
code defines the result of the write operation:

200 The write request could be handled. The write request is passed to the OHV Suite.
403 The requested element exists but cannot be modified through a write request.
404 The requested element could not be found.
410 The requested element is known but the destination for writing the value was
deleted.

Although a return status of 200 indicates that the write request was passed to
the OHV Suite it is not guaranteed that the new value was actually written.
Depending on the actual value which is updated the written value may be
automatically overwritten or changed through OHV Suite. A subsequent or
periodic read to monitor changes is highly recommended.

In case of an error response the Remote-API returns data as application/json, containing a single
error key with the http status code as its value.

10.3 Remote-API endpoints

The Remote-API provides some common endpoints which are always available when the Remote-
API is available. Other endpoints are only available when the OHV Suite is connected to a device
or a replay file is opened.

10.3.1 Common Remote-API endpoints

Common Remote-API endpoints are always available, independent from any active device connec-
tion.

Endpoint Description

about A read-only endpoint to query details about

the OHV Suite.
version A read-only endpoint to query version in-
formation about the Remote-API and the
OHV Suite.
pd/settings The endpoint to read and write PDD specific
settings.

pd/connect The endpoint to establish device connec-

tions.

pd/devices Read-only endpoint to query the available

devices.

Table 10.1: Available common Remote-API endpoints

Endpoint about
This endpoint provides information about the OHV Suite contact information. This includes the
full address and communication details. Listing 10.1 shows an example GET command (Line 1)
and its response for the about endpoint (Lines 2 - 10).

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 72 of 102

Listing 10.1: Endpoint about command and response

1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/about

2 {
3 "address1": "ohv diagnostic GmbH",
4 "address2": "Grossenhainer Strasse 101",
5 "address3": "01127 Dresden",
6 "address4": "Germany",
7 "email": "[email protected]",
8 "phone": "+49 351 795273-00",
9 "web": "http://www.ohv-diagnostic.com"
10 }

Endpoint version
This endpoint provides version information about OHV Suite and the Remote-API. This includes
the product_name, api_version and software_version. Listing 10.2 shows an example GET com-
mand (Line 1) and its response for the version endpoint (Lines 2 - 10). The api_version can
be used to detect the version of the Remote-API in use. The syntax for this key and the name of
this endpoint is guaranteed to be identical for all versions of the Remote-API.

Listing 10.2: Endpoint version command and response

1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/version

2 {
3 "api_version": 1,
4 "product_name": "OHV Suite",
5 "software_version": "3.4.0.13131 (1d9f860)"
6 }

Endpoint pd/settings
This endpoint provides access to PD specific settings. It is possible to read and write settings
through this endpoint. Listing 10.3 provides an example response for a GET command (Line 1)
sent to the endpoint. The response contains all available settings keys and their current value.

Listing 10.3: Endpoint pd/settings command and response

1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/settings

2 {
3 "custom_file_name_template": false,
4 "data_directory": "C:/Users/Public/Documents/ohv diagnostic GmbH/PD Measurements",
5 "default_bipolar_scaling": false,
6 "default_signal_display_type": "qiec",
7 "default_voltage_display_type": "rms",
8 "file_name_template": "%TYPE% %SERIAL% %DATE%_%TIME%",
9 "manual_recording_size": false,
10 "recording_comment": false,
11 "reporting_use_unique_diagrams": false,
12 "start_recording_with_measurement": false,
13 "synchronize_channel_layout": false
14 }

From the settings keys returned in Listing 10.3 only the keys given in Table 10.2 can be modified
through the Remote-API. Manipulating a settings key is performed through a POST command.
The settings key and its new value are provided as additional url parameters. Listing 10.4 shows
an example for manipulating the default_bipolar_scaling setting. The key is specified
through the id parameter and its new value through the value parameter.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 73 of 102

Key Description

start_recording_with_measurement A boolean flag if recording should be started

with each measurement.
default_bipolar_scaling A boolean flag if the charge diagrams should
be displayed with bipolar values.
default_signal_display_type A string with the default signal value (can
be one of ’qiec’, ’max’, ’peak’ or ’qm’).
default_voltage_display_type A string with the default voltage value (can
be one of ’peak’, ’peak_sqrt2’ or ’rms’).

Table 10.2: Writable PD settings keys

Listing 10.4: Example POST command for the pd/settings endpoint

1 # POST http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/settings?id=default_bipolar_scaling&value=true

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 74 of 102

Endpoint pd/connect
This endpoint provides the logic to connect to a new device. It is possible to read and write through
this endpoint. Listing 10.5 provides an example response for a GET command (Line 1) sent to the
endpoint. The response provides information about all currently available devices series which are
available for the current installation. Each key in the returned JSON object defines a device series
identification which can be used to establish the corresponding device connection. The proper
device series identification for each available device is depicted in Table 4.1. The connection url
shows the parameters which are required for a specific device.

Some of the provided device series identifications are only available through a
license. The remote API functionality for specific device series is only available
if the device series is activated.

Listing 10.5: Endpoint connect GET command and response

1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/connect

2 {
3 "pd": {
4 "description": "PD device",
5 "schemes": ["pd"],
6 "url": "@SCHEMA@://@IP@:@PORT1@?timeout=@TIMEOUT@"
7 },
8 "pd_low_cost": {
9 "description": "PD Low Cost",
10 "schemes": ["pdlc", "pdlowcost"],
11 "url": "@SCHEMA@://@IP@:@PORT1@?data=@PORT2@&timeout=@TIMEOUT@&serial=@SERIAL@"
12 },
13 "pd_replay": {
14 "description": "PD Replay",
15 "schemes": ["pdreplayohv"],
16 "url": "@SCHEMA@:///@FILE@"
17 },
18 "pd_replay_lxd": {
19 "description": "PD LXD replay",
20 "schemes": ["lxd"],
21 "url": "@SCHEMA@:///@FILE@"
22 },
23 "pd_replay_tdms": {
24 "description": "PD TDMS replay",
25 "schemes": ["tdms"],
26 "url": "@SCHEMA@:///@FILE@"
27 }
28 }

When establishing a connection to a device the series identification must be provided as the series
parameter. The needed series id for a specific device can be retrieved from Table 4.1. The optional
parameter are needed when any of the connection parameter given in Listing 10.5 for the requested
series identification needs to be adjusted. If for example a different IP address (192.168.42.51) needs
to be used when connecting to a pd device the request on Line 2 in Listing 10.6 must be used.
All possible parameters for each device connection are found in Listing 10.5 within each url value
(each text within @@ can be used as a lower case parameter) for a series identification. Specifying
the connection scheme for the URL is not needed. The remote API will automatically select an
evailable connection scheme when omitted.

Listing 10.6: Example POST command for the pd/connect endpoint

1 # POST http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/connect?series=<SERIES>&<OPTIONAL>
2 # POST http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/connect?series=pd&ip=192.168.42.51

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 75 of 102

Endpoint pd/devices
This endpoint provides access to the list of available PD devices. Listing 10.7 provides an example
response for a GET command (Line 1) sent to the endpoint. The response returns JSON content
where each available device is represent with its id as the key.

Listing 10.7: Endpoint pd/devices command and response

1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/devices

2 {
3 "0": {
4 "id": "0",
5 "class": "pd",
6 "serial_number": "1234567890",
7 "series": "pd",
8 "status": "established",
9 "timestamp": 1689074425818,
10 "url": "pd://10.0.0.1:6000?timeout=10"
11 }
12 }

Key Description

id The unique identification for this device. Every request to this

device needs this id as part of the url.
class The device class for this device. This returns ’pd’ for all devices
reported through this endpoint.
serial_number The device serial number string
series The device series. Different PD devices may be connected, this
contains the device series identification.
status The connection status to the device. This can be one of ’con-
necting’, ’disconnected’, ’established’, ’failed’ or ’disconnecting’.
timestamp The timestamp for the last connection status change.
url The connection url to the device.

Table 10.3: PD devices response keys

10.3.2 Device specific Remote-API endpoints

Device specific Remote-API endpoints are only available if the OHV Suite has at least one estab-
lished device connection.
Endpoint Description

pd/devices/* The endpoint to read and write settings for

a specific device.
pd/devices/*/channels Read-only endpoint to query the available
channels within one device.
pd/devices/*/channels/* The endpoint to read and write settings for
one specific channel.
pd/devices/*/channels/*/scalars Read-only endpoint to request the scalar
measurement values from one device chan-
nel.
pd/devices/*/channels/*/data Read-only endpoint to request vector data
from one device channel.

Table 10.4: Available device specific Remote-API endpoints

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 76 of 102

Endpoint pd/devices/*
This endpoint provides access to properties of a single PD device. The endpoint contains a single
placeholder * which needs to be replaced with the id for the device in question. Listing 10.8
provides an example response for a GET command (Line 1) sent to the endpoint for the device
with id 0. Table 10.5 explains all keys in more detail. The device id cannot be used before the
values was reported through the pd/devices endpoint. Requesting a device id before it was
reported through pd/devices will return an 404 error.

Listing 10.8: Endpoint pd/devices command and response

1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/devices/0

2 {
3 "active": true,
4 "current_trigger_type": "artifical_trigger",
5 "enabled_gating_channels": "",
6 "enabled_input_channels": "",
7 "enabled_pd_channels": "0",
8 "enabled_voltage_channels": "",
9 "is_replay_device": false,
10 "number_of_channels": 6,
11 "recording": {
12 "control": "",
13 "pattern_snapshot_timeout": 30000,
14 "qtut_overview_timeout": 250,
15 "recording_file_duration_changed": "168",
16 "recording_file_name": "",
17 "recording_file_size_changed": "27418624",
18 "recording_fileinfo_timeout": 5000,
19 "status": "recording_active"
20 },
21 "serial_number": "2001230050",
22 "temperature": 48.60110473618,
23 "tv_channel": {
24 "attenuator_index": 7,
25 "calibration": {
26 "calibration_factor": 0,
27 "calibration_target": 5,
28 "details": "",
29 "process": "finished",
30 "status": "not calibrated"
31 },
32 "gain_levels": "-120;0;6;12;18;24;30;36",
33 "min_max_gain_index": "1;7",
34 "synchronisation_source": "extern"
35 }
36 }

Key Description

active Boolean flag if the device is currently measuring or not.

current_trigger_type What source is currently used to detect the zero crossings
for phase values of pulses. Can be either artificial_trigger
if no synchronisation is available, period_trigger if a syn-
chronisation voltage is detected. If the device has VLF
processing available the trigger type can also be vlf_trigger
if VLF measurement mode is active.
enabled_gating_channels The list of semicolon separated channel index values cur-
rently used for gating. Can only contain values if the device
has gating channel available.
enabled_input_channels The list of currently enabled input channels. Input channels
are additional channels selected for non-PD measurements
and are listed with semicolon as separator. Only available
if the device provides such channels (see Section 10.3.2 for
details).

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 77 of 102

enabled_pd_channels The list of currently enabled PD channels. PD channels

are channels selected for PD measurements and are listed
with semicolon as separator.
enabled_voltage_channels The list of currently enabled synchronisation channels. syn-
chronisation channels are channels selected for voltage and
frequency measurements and are listed with semicolon as
separator.
is_replay_device Boolean flag if the device connection comes from an opened
replay file.
number_of_channels The total number of available channels. This includes all
PD and additional input channels.
recording.control The last written recording control string. The value is
JSON formatted as string.
recording.pattern_snapshot_timeout The interval for storing preview pattern images in the re-
play file.
recording.qtut_overview_timeout The interval for adding new QtUt values to the replay
overview diagram.
recording.recording_file_duration_changed During recording the total recording duration is provided
here. Only available once a recording was started.
recording.recording_file_name The currently used file for recording PD data. Only avail-
able once a recording was started.
recording.recording_file_size_changed During recording the number of bytes writ-
ten to the recording file. Is updated every
recording.recording_fileinfo_timeout mil-
liseconds.
recording.recording_fileinfo_timeout The interval in milliseconds for updating the
recording.recording_file_size_changed key.
recording.status The current recording status. Can be either record-
ing_inactive or recording_active
serial_number The device serial number.
temperature If the device provides an internal temperature sensor the
value is provided here.
tv_channel.attenuator_index The currently used attenuator index for the active synchro-
nisation channel.
tv_channel.calibration.calibration_factor The calibration factor for the voltage reading.
tv_channel.calibration.calibration_target The last set calibration target in kV.
tv_channel.calibration.details After a valid voltage calibration some statistics are pro-
vided here. If the calibration fails the error information are
also provided here.
tv_channel.calibration.process When accessed through reading this returns the current
calibration process. Can be one of failed, reset, starting,
finished or running.
tv_channel.calibration.status" String representing the calibration state. Can be either
calibrated or not calibrated.
tv_channel.gain_levels The available gain levels for each gain index. The first
element in the semicolon separated list is mapped to the
minimum gain index and the last value is mapped to the
maximum gain index.
tv_channel.min_max_gain_index The lowest and highest available gain index.
tv_channel.synchronisation_source The currently selected synchronisation source type. Can be
either intern for mains triggering or externfor an external
voltage signal from an TV channel.

Table 10.5: PD single device response keys

From the device parameters returned in Listing 10.8 only the ids given in Table 10.6 can be

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 78 of 102

modified through the Remote-API. Manipulating a device parameter is performed through a POST
command. The device parameter and its new value are provided as additional url parameters.
Listing 10.9 shows an example for manipulating the active setting. The key is specified through
the id parameter and its new value through the value parameter.

Key Description

active Boolean value to control the measurement state of the de-

vice. If set to false the measurement is stopped.
tv_channel.synchronisation_source_request One of the possible values for the TV channel synchro-
nisation source can be written here to swith the syn-
chronisation source. Dependending on the configura-
tion not every source type may available and thus writ-
ing that as a request will not change the value for
tv_channel.synchronisation_source.
tv_channel.calibration.calibration_factor Can be written for a manual calibration. The factor is
applied immediately and the calibration status is set to
calibrated. Only external synchronisation can be calibrated.
tv_channel.calibration.calibration_target The parameter to specify the current input value for the
external synchronisation source. Only external synchroni-
sation can be calibrated.
tv_channel.calibration.process Writing starting will start the calibration to the given tar-
get value. Writing reset will clear any applied calibration or
abort any started calibration process. Only external syn-
chronisation can be calibrated.

Table 10.6: Writable PD devices keys

Listing 10.9: Example POST command to enable measurement for the device with id 0
1 # POST http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/devices/0?id=active&value=true

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 79 of 102

Endpoint pd/devices/*/channels
This endpoint provides access to the list of available channels for a single PD device. Listing 10.10
provides an example response for a GET command (Line 1) sent to the endpoint for the device
with id 0. The response returns JSON content where each available channel is provided with its
id in an array under the channels key.

Listing 10.10: Endpoint pd/devices command and response

1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/devices/0/channels

2 {
3 "channels": [
4 "0",
5 "1",
6 "2",
7 "3",
8 "4",
9 "5"
10 ]
11 }

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 80 of 102

Endpoint pd/devices/*/channels/*
This endpoint provides access to properties of a single channel. The endpoint contains two place-
holder * which need to be replaced with the id for the device and the channel index in question.
Listing 10.11 provides an example response for a GET command (Line 1) sent to the endpoint for
the device with id 0 and its first channel with index 0. Table 10.7 explains all keys in more detail.
Requesting an channel index with a value greater or equal to the number of available channels (the
channel index is zero based) will return an 404 error.

Listing 10.11: Endpoint pd/devices command and response

1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/devices/0/channels/0

2 {
3 "attenuator_index": 0,
4 "autorange_mode": "semi",
5 "channel_name": "IN 1",
6 "data_path": 0,
7 "enabled": false,
8 "evaluation": {
9 "background_color": "#ffffff",
10 "bipolar": false,
11 "frequency_publish_time": 0.5,
12 "pattern_axis_scaling_y": "linear",
13 "pattern_dimension_x": 720,
14 "pattern_dimension_y": 360,
15 "pattern_palette": "...",
16 "pattern_publish_time": 0.2,
17 "pattern_scale_x": 360,
18 "pattern_scale_y": 10,
19 "period_display_interval": 150,
20 "period_streaming_publish_time": 0.25,
21 "pulse_counter_publish_time": 0.5,
22 "qiec_publish_time": 0.5,
23 "qiec_tau1": 0.44,
24 "qiec_tau2": 0.5,
25 "qtut_update_rate": 200,
26 "used_evaluators": "...",
27 "windowing_enabled": false,
28 "windowing_list": ""
29 },
30 "gain_levels": "6;26",
31 "gating_status": "deactivated",
32 "min_max_gain_index": "0;1",
33 "pd_calibration": {
34 "calibration_factor": 0,
35 "calibration_target": 20,
36 "details": "",
37 "process": "finished",
38 "status": "not calibrated"
39 },
40 "phase_shift": 0,
41 "trigger_level": 0
42 }
43 }

Key Description

attenuator_index The currently active attenuator index.

autorange_mode The currently active autorange mode.
channel_name The channel name displayed in the OHV Suite
data_path The currently selected digital filter type for this channel
enabled Boolean flag if the channel is currently enabled (selected
for measurement).
evaluation.background_color The pattern background colder value. Reported as HTML
color code.
evaluation.bipolar Status if PD events are reported with sign information
(true) or without (false).
evaluation.frequency_publish_time How often is a new frequency value published for this chan-
nel (in seconds).

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 81 of 102

evaluation.pattern_axis_scaling_y The upper limit for the PRPDA diagram.

evaluation.pattern_dimension_x The pattern image dimension (x-axis) in pixels.
evaluation.pattern_dimension_y The pattern image dimension (y-axis) in pixels.
evaluation.pattern_palette JSON data describing the current pattern palette (associ-
ation between color and repetition rate).
evaluation.pattern_publish_time How often a new PRPDA image is generated. Although
always every peaks is contained in the PRPDA image, the
image itself is not regenerated for every peak. This time is
given in seconds.
evaluation.pattern_scale_x The scaling for the x-axis of the PRPDA (given in °)
evaluation.pattern_scale_y The maximum signal value for the PRPDA image.
evaluation.period_display_interval How often a new period is displayed in the OHV Suite
evaluation.pulse_counter_publish_time How often new pulse counter data is published (in seconds).
evaluation.qiec_publish_time How often a new QIEC value is publised (in seconds).
evaluation.qiec_tau1 The currently used tau1 factor for the QIEC calculation.
evaluation.qiec_tau2 The currently used tau2 factor for the QIEC calculation.
evaluation.qtut_update_rate How often a new value is added to the QtUt diagram (in
milliseconds).
evaluation.used_evaluators The list with the different types of values which should be
calculated for this channel.
evaluation.windowing_enabled Flag if windowing is enabled for this channel.
evaluation.windowing_list If windowing is enabled this key contains the information
about any windows which are defined for the channel.
gain_levels The available gain levels for this channel in dB.
gating_status The gating status for this channel.
min_max_gain_index The lowest and highest available gain index.
pd_calibration.calibration_factor The calibration factor for the signal value reading.
pd_calibration.calibration_target The last set calibration target in the current unit for this
channel.
pd_calibration.details After a valid voltage calibration some statistics are pro-
vided here. If the calibration fails the error information are
also provided here.
pd_calibration.process When accessed through reading this returns the current
calibration process. Can be one of failed, reset, starting,
finished or running.
pd_calibration.status String representing the calibration state. Can be either
calibrated or not calibrated.
phase_shift The current phase shift for all pulses received for this chan-
nel. Every pulse is shifted by this amount of °.
trigger_level The trigger level for this channel. Only pulses above this
level are reported.

Table 10.7: PD single channel response keys

From the channel parameters returned in Listing 10.11 only the ids given in Table 10.8 can be
modified through the Remote-API. Manipulating a channel parameter is performed through a
POST command. The channel parameter and its new value are provided as additional url param-
eters. Listing 10.12 shows an example for manipulating the request_enabled setting. The key
is specified through the id parameter and its new value through the value parameter.

Key Description

attenuator_index Select a new attenuator index. This must be within the range
returned by min_max_gain_index

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 82 of 102

autorange_mode Select the automatic gain change algorithm. Writing full will en-
able full autoranging. In full mode the device will increase and
decrease attenuation according to the input signal automatically.
Writing semi will enable semi autoranging. In semi mode the
device will only increase attenuation in case the input signal is
too high for the currently selected gain but will not automatically
switch to a lower attenuation when the signal is too small for the
current gain. Finally the autoranging functionality can be disabled
by writing none as the autorange mode.
data_path The currently selected PD filter mode. Only available for PD chan-
nels. This key accepts three values (0 for disable digital filtering,
1 for IEC frequency range filtering and 2 for wideband filter se-
lection.
displayed_signal_type A string with the default signal value (can be one of ’qiec’, ’max’,
’peak’ or ’qm’).
displayed_voltage_type A string with the default voltage value (can be one of ’peak’,
’peak_sqrt2’ or ’rms’).
evaluation.background_color Writing an HTML color code to this key will change the PRDPA
background color.
evaluation.bipolar Flag to select if PD events should be reported with sign information
(bipolar) or without (unipolar).
evaluation.pattern_clear Writing any value (even an empty value) to this key will clear the
pattern diagram.
evaluation.pattern_axis_scaling Can be used to select linear or logarithmic Y-axis scaling for the
PRPDA diagram.
evaluation.pattern_dimension_x This setting control the width of the PRPDA image in pixels.
evaluation.pattern_dimension_y This setting control the height of the PRPDA image in pixels.
evaluation.pattern_palette This setting can be used to set a new PRPDA color palette used
for evaluation.
evaluation.pattern_scale_x Writing to this setting will change the phase range contained in
the PRPDA.
evaluation.pattern_scale_y Writing to this setting will change the maximum signal value con-
tained in the PRPDA. Any value larger than this value is auto-
matically put into the overflow PRPDA image.
evaluation.qiec_tau1 Sets a new tau1 value for the QIEC calculation.
evaluation.qiec_tau2 Sets a new tau2 value for the QIEC calculation.
evaluation.windowing_enabled Enable or disable the windowing feature for this channel.
evaluation.windowing_list Sets the list of windowing elements which are used for windowing.
Only applied when windowing is enabled.
request_enabled Can be used to enable or disable this channel. For multiplexed
devices enabling one channel will automatically disable any other
active device on the same multiplexer.
gating_status Status if gating is currently active, enabled or disabled for this
channel.
pd_calibration.calibration_factor Can be written for a manual calibration. The factor is applied
immediately and the calibration status is set to calibrated.
pd_calibration.calibration_target The parameter to specify the current input value for the external
synchronisation source.
pd_calibration.process Writing starting will start the calibration to the given target value.
Writing reset will clear any applied calibration or abort any started
calibration process. Only external synchronisation can be cali-
brated.
phase_shift Specify a manual phase shift for all pulses received for this channel.
Can be any value in the range from -360 ° to 360 °
trigger_level Sets a new trigger level for this channel.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 83 of 102

Table 10.8: Writable channel keys

Listing 10.12: Example POST command to enable first channel for device with id 0
1 # POST http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/devices/0/channels/0?id=request_enabled&value=true

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 84 of 102

Endpoint pd/devices/*/channels/scalars
This endpoint provides access to the list of available measured and calculated scalar values for a
single PD device channel. Listing 10.13 provides an example response for a GET command (Line
1) sent to the endpoint for the UHF channel 0 of the device with id 0. The response returns JSON
content with separate values and units for every scalar value (cf. Table 10.9). The minimum and
maximum values are always given for the whole duration of the measurement.

Listing 10.13: Endpoint pd/devices/*/channels/*/scalars command and

response
1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/devices/0/channels/0/scalars

2 {
3 "pd_absolute_maximum_signal": 1.0718296349047876,
4 "pd_absolute_maximum_signal_unit": "mV",
5 "pd_absolute_minimum_signal": 0.5703313653621805,
6 "pd_absolute_minimum_signal_unit": "mV",
7 "pd_absolute_negative_maximum_signal": 1.0718296349047876,
8 "pd_absolute_negative_maximum_unit": "mV",
9 "pd_absolute_positive_maximum_signal": 1.0200979293509467,
10 "pd_absolute_positive_maximum_unit": "mV",
11 "pd_current_qiec": 0.9138061385097205,
12 "pd_current_qiec_unit": "mV",
13 "pd_current_qm": 10,
14 "pd_current_qm_unit": "mV",
15 "pd_maximum_qiec": 0.9298751123246272,
16 "pd_maximum_qiec_unit": "mV",
17 "pd_maximum_qm": 10,
18 "pd_maximum_qm_unit": "mV",
19 "pd_measurement_frequency": 20,
20 "pd_measurement_frequency_unit": "Hz",
21 "pd_measurement_voltage_peak": 0,
22 "pd_measurement_voltage_peak_unit": "kV",
23 "pd_measurement_voltage_rms": 0,
24 "pd_measurement_voltage_rms_unit": "kV",
25 "pd_minimum_qm": 10,
26 "pd_minimum_qm_unit": "mV",
27 "pd_pulse_rate": 7613.940594059339,
28 "pd_pulse_rate_duration": 25.250000000000224,
29 "pd_pulse_rate_duration_unit": "s",
30 "pd_pulse_rate_unit": "1/s",
31 "pd_timestamp_measurement_frequency": 1689232875525,
32 "pd_timestamp_measurement_voltage": 1689232852167,
33 "pd_timestamp_pulse_rate": 1689232875525,
34 "pd_timestamp_qiec": 1689232875976,
35 "pd_timestamp_qm": 1689232875477,
36 "pd_timestamp_signal": 1689232872873
37 }

Key Description

pd_absolute_maximum_signal The maximum value for |signal_value|.

pd_absolute_minimum_signal The minimum value for |signal_value|.
pd_absolute_negative_maximum_signal The absolute maximum value of all negative peaks.
pd_absolute_positive_maximum_signal The absolute maximum value of all positive peaks.
pd_current_qiec The current measured QIEC reading. For UHF measurements
this is the averaged signal value.
pd_current_qm The current measured Qm value. The Qm value is defined as
the highest magnitude of peaks with a pulse rate for 10 or more.
pd_maximum_qiec The maximum measured QIEC reading. For UHF measure-
ments this is the averaged signal value.
pd_maximum_qm The maximum measured Qm value.
pd_measurement_frequency The current synchronisation frequency.
pd_measurement_voltage_peak The current synchronisation voltage (peak value).
pd_measurement_voltage_rms The current synchronisation voltage (RMS calculated value).
pd_minimum_qm The minimum measured Qm value.
pd_pulse_rate The current pulse rate in 1s

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 85 of 102

pd_pulse_rate_duration The duration in seconds for the pulse rate calculation.

pd_timestamp_measurement_frequency The Unix timestamp when the last frequency was published.
pd_timestamp_measurement_voltage The Unix timestamp when the last voltage was published.
pd_timestamp_pulse_rate The Unix timestamp when the last pulse rate was published.
pd_timestamp_qiec The Unix timestamp when the last QIEC value was published.
pd_timestamp_qm The Unix timestamp when the last Qm value was published.
pd_timestamp_signal The Unix timestamp when the last signal value was published.

Table 10.9: PD single channel scalar values response keys

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
10.3. REMOTE-API ENDPOINTS Page 86 of 102

Endpoint pd/devices/*/channels/data
This endpoint provides access to the list of available measured and calculated vector data for a
single PD device channel. Listing 10.14 provides an example response for a GET command (Line
1) sent to the endpoint for the UHF channel 0 of the device with id 0 with placeholders for all
parameters accepted by this endpoint. The possible values for each parameter are detailed in
Table 10.10).

Listing 10.14: Endpoint pd/devices/*/channels/*/scalars command and

response
1 # GET http://<IP>:<PORT>/pd/devices/0/channels/0/data?id=<ID>&type=<TYPE>&details=<DETAILS>

Parameter Description

<ID> This parameter defines the requested vector data identifi-

cation. Currently supported are prpda for PRPDA data,
qtut for QtUt data, hnq for HNQ data and pulse_count for
pulse count data. If this parameter is missing it defaults to
prpda.
<TYPE> For the prpda identification this can be either image or
json. For all other identifications this can only be json. If
the type is image the returned content is a PNG image file.
For json the returned content is JSON. If this parameter is
missing it defaults to image.
<DETAILS> Optional parameter which can be used to configure the
data returned through the given <ID> parameter. Cur-
rently support for the hnq identification only. For the
pulse_count identification the details parameter can spec-
ify the requested interval (possible values are 1, 10, 30 and
60).

Table 10.10: PD single channel vector data request parameter

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

A
General Information

This chapter describes the general overview of the OHV Suite software. The software is designed
modular which allows loading of different modules during run time. General description inside
this section is how to get information about the software version, contact information and change
main settings.

A.1 General software structure

The general structure of the software is split into two main parts. In Figure A.1 the structure of
OHV Suite can be seen.

Figure A.1: Logical software structure

On left side of the software, marked with A , all available applications are show and can be
selected. The right part of the software, marked with B , is used for displaying the screen for the
selected application.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 88 of 102

A.2 Start screen - Main application

After starting of OHV Suite software the start screen with the main application 1 is shown (cf.
Figure A.2).

I
A
B

C
D
II
III

Figure A.2: Start screen (marked important information)

The left side of the contains three applications which are marked with I , II and III . The
application I is the Main Application described inside this section. The II is the application for
managing the connections of the different device types and is described in Chapter B. The third
application III is the PD Application which allows to handle connected PD devices and opening
recorded files. The documentation of this application is part of this Manual.
1 contains all available sub application options which are available for the main application. The
right side 2 displays the first sub application page ( A ). On this page all available applications
are listed. The start screen can be reached by clicking on the button I and than on button A .
The main application contains the following sub applications:

A Welcome page, which displays the start screen

B Settings page, which allows to change application settings

C About page, which displays the general information

D Allows to close the OHV Suite software

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 89 of 102

A.2.1 Settings
The settings could be reached by using the B (cf. Figure A.2) button. The selected sub settings
page is shown on the right side.

General settings
The OHV Suite software is written as multi-language application which allows to switch between
different languages. Each different languages can be selected on the general settings page. By
changing a new language the application is automatically switched into the new selected language
without restarting. Additionally it is possible to check for available application updates. Available
update files can be automatically downloaded when an update is found.

1
2
3

Figure A.3: General settings

Available licensing packages

The OHV Suite software contains several packages which are licensed and can be purchased sepa-
rately. The list of available licensed packages and the current status of them can be seen below the
Software Updates (marked with A in Figure A.3). The list is only visible if at least one license
package is available inside the software.
Licensed packages are bound to the local machine where the software is installed. For installing
the software on a new machine the activation is no longer valid and must be done again. Updating
the software will not change the activation state of the licensed packages.
For each of available package a description (which is not localized), the license identification and
the current status is shown. If a package is successfully licensed the status Package activated is
shown on the right side of the license identification and on the left side the icon is green.
Packages which are currently not activated will display three buttons on the right side of the license
identification. The button can be used to copy the license identification to the clipboard. The
button e-mail will open the registered e-mail program and adds the license identification directly
into the e-mail which could be send to ohv diagnostic GmbH for retrieving the activation code. To
activate a package the button Activate must be clicked. It will open a new window (cf. Figure A.4)
which allows to insert the retrieved activation code and activate the license. The button (2)
can be used to insert the activation code from the clipboard into the text field ( 1 ). By clicking
on the Save button ( 3 ) the license activation will be saved.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 90 of 102

2 3
1

Figure A.4: Package activation

After inserting and saving the activation code the application must be closed
and restarted!

Application selection
This setting can be reached by a click on the button marked with 2 inside the settings page.
On the top of the application settings (cf. A on Figure A.5) all available applications are listed.
These applications can be enabled or disabled inside the OHV Suite software.

Disabled applications could not be used and are not shown inside the applica-
tion list.

1
2
3

Figure A.5: Application selection

On the bottom of the application settings (cf. B on Figure A.5) all modules are listed which
are required to provide different functionality used inside the OHV Suite software. These modules
could not be disabled like the applications above.
Each of these parts have its own program version. The different version information can be shown
by using the mouse and hover over the module or application. After a short time a tool-tip is
shown with all information of the module or application.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 91 of 102

General Application Settings

The general application settings can be selected with button 3 in Figure A.6. Within this section
all the available application settings can be found. These settings depends on the application
that was detected during the loading of different libraries when starting the OHV Suite. When
an application setting is selected on the the left side (cf. A on Figure A.6) the setting can be
modified.

1
2
3

B
A

Figure A.6: General Application settings

Catalog The DAC Catalog settings are described in DAC User Guide.

Measurement The DAC measurement settings are described in DAC User Guide.

Analysis The Analysis settings are described in DAC User Guide.

PD Analysis The PD Analysis application settings are described inside PD User Guide 6.1.

Remote-API The Remote-API application settings are described inside PD User Guide 10.1.

Scripting Host The diagram settings are described in section C.2.

Diagram The diagram settings are described in section C.1.

Advanced settings
The button 4 in Figure A.6 shows a window for inserting a password which enables advanced
settings. These advanced settings are only for the developers and service engineers of ohv diagnostic
GmbH.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
A.2. START SCREEN - MAIN APPLICATION Page 92 of 102

A.2.2 About

Figure A.7: About information

This page contains all information about the OHV Suite software and the contact information.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

B
Connection Manager

This chapter describes the functionality how to connect to a device. It will be depicted how a
connection for all available and supported devices of the OHV Suite software.
The connection could be established in two different ways and will be described in the next sections.
The first way is the auto discovery of the available devices inside the network which is depicted
in Section B.1. Managing device specific types of the connection will be described inside the
Section B.2.

Maybe not all parts are available in the used software, which depends on the
installation type and ordered product!

B.1 Auto discovery of devices

The auto discovery of devices will list all available devices which are found inside the network and
is supported through the OHV Suite software. The auto discovery view can be reached by clicking
on the Auto Discovery button inside the Connection Manager application ( 1 in Figure B.1). The
device list marked with A in Figure B.1 contains all supported device types found in the network.
For all successfully established connections the connected Information can be seen at the end of the
device information (cf. Figure B.2). A new connection could only be established for devices which
are currently not connected. The connection to a device could be established by double clicking
to the device. After the connection was established the application is automatically switching to
the connected device overview.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
B.1. AUTO DISCOVERY OF DEVICES Page 94 of 102

Figure B.1: Connection Manager with auto discovery

Figure B.2: Connection Manager with auto discovery and connected device

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
B.2. MANAGE CONNECTIONS Page 95 of 102

B.2 Manage Connections

The Manage Connections allows to connect to devices which are not found with the auto discovery
method. By clicking to the button Manage Connections ( 1 in Figure B.3) the connection manager
for the devices is opened. Inside the top part ( A ) all the connected devices will be depicted with
the current connection state. The area B can be used to select the device type which should
be used to establish a connection. The C displays the automatically found device for DAC or
PDD, depending on the selected device type. The bottom part ( D ) is used to enter or select the
connection information manually.

B.2.1 Manage DAC connection

A new DAC connection can be established by clicking on button DAC device. After this the
connection view for DAC devices is activated (cf. Figure B.3). If any DAC device was detected
inside the network the device can be open by a double click. The button Click here to show
connection parameter will display the connection options for the DAC device. The Table B.1
describe the different elements for the connection to a DAC device. By clicking on the button
Connect to device it will be tried to establish the connection with the provided information.

A
1

Figure B.3: Connection Manager DAC connection

Element Description

Device IP Address The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the device can be en-
tered in this field or can be selected from the list of
found addresses on the left selection button.
Connection Port Here you can specify an alternative port for the con-
nection.
Connection timeout This field specifies timeout after which a connection
is interrupted.
Connect to device For connection to a device with specified connection
information this button must be used.

Table B.1: Connection elements for a DAC device

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
B.2. MANAGE CONNECTIONS Page 96 of 102

B.2.2 Manage PDD connection

A new PDD connection can be established by clicking on button PDD device. After this the
connection view for PDD devices is activated (cf. Figure B.4). If any PDD device was detected
inside the network the device can be open by a double click inside the list of automatically found
devices. The button Click here to show connection parameter will display the connection options
for the PDD device. The Table B.2 describe the different elements for the connection to a PDD
device. By clicking on the button Connect to device it will be tried to establish the connection
with the provided information.

A
1

Figure B.4: Connection Manager PDD connection

Element Description

Device IP Address The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the device can be en-
tered in this field or can be selected from the list of
found addresses on the left selection button.
Connection Port Here you can specify an alternative port for the con-
nection.
Connection timeout This field specifies timeout after which a connection
is interrupted.
Connect to device For connection to a device with specified connection
information this button must be used.

Table B.2: Connection elements for a PDD device

B.2.3 Manage PDD Low Cost connection

A new PDD Low Cost connection can be established by clicking on button PDD Low Cost. After
this the connection view for PDD Low Cost devices is activated (cf. Figure B.5). Different to the
other connections a PDD Low Cost device could not be automatically detected. For such a device
the connection options must be inserted manually. The Table B.3 describe the different elements
for the connection to a PDD Low Cost device. By clicking on the button Connect to device it will
be tried to establish the connection with the provided information.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
B.2. MANAGE CONNECTIONS Page 97 of 102

A
1

Figure B.5: Connection Manager PDD Low Cost connection

Element Description

Device IP Address The IPv4 address of the device must be entered to

this field.
Connection Configuration Port The port for the configuration must be entered here.
Connection Measurement Port The port for the measurement data must be entered
here.
Connection timeout This field specifies timeout after which a connection
is interrupted.
Connect to device For connection to a device with specified connection
information this button must be used.

Table B.3: Connection elements for a PDD Low Cost device

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
Appendix

C
General Application Settings

This chapter describes the general application settings available in the OHV Suite software. Inside
the application settings, available will be the basic settings (cf. A on Figure C.1) for all the
selected applications like the PD Analysis, Measurement, Analysis, catalog. The settings for all
the other applications varies with the type of the application. The configuration settings basically
has two modes namely, Simple Mode and Advanced Mode which can be selected according to the
requirements of the user.

1
2
3

B
A

Figure C.1: Application settings

C.1 Diagram Settings

Along with these settings, an option for selecting the Diagrams and when selected, user can export
the Diagrams from the export folder as seen in (cf. B on Figure C.1).

C.2 Scripting Host

The scripting host contains a list with all available registered scripting provider. Depending on
the registered scripting host different options are available.

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 List of Figures

4.1 PDD device front and rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

4.2 PDD-2/UHF opened view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.3 PDD-3/PDD-3-Display opened view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.4 PDD-2/D front operating elements overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.5 PDD-2 and PDD-2/D rear connectors overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.6 PDD-2 and PDD-2/UHF connectors overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.7 PDD-3 and PDD-3-Display connectors overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.8 Basic PD measuring circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

5.1 Bad and good input signal levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

5.2 Wrong attenuation example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

6.1 General software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

6.2 Recording and reporting configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.3 Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.4 Device overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.5 Available device control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.6 Enable / disable single channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.7 Switch between channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.8 No recording active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.9 Recording dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.10 Replay control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.11 Reporting control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.12 Reporting finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.13 Channel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.14 Example menus for voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.15 Frequency states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.16 Calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.17 Manual calibration elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.18 Phase resolved data container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.19 Pulses diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.20 Windowing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.21 EllipticPulses diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.22 PRPDA diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.23 HNQ diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.24 HNQ time based diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.25 HNQ time based interval progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.26 Time resolved Qt/Ut diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.27 Qt/Ut diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.28 QU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.29 Qm diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.30 Pulse counter diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.31 Calibration of fault location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.32 Results of enabling gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page 100 of 102

6.33 Results of activating gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

6.34 Viewing all channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.35 Single diagram with view selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.36 Calibration of fault location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.37 Running a fault location measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.38 Phase resolved VLF data pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.39 User interface to open recorded measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.40 User interface to open recorded measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.41 Replay overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.42 Pattern preview information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.43 Action preview information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.44 Replay overview with progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

7.1 Basic Placeholder example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

7.2 Template table example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

10.1 Remote API configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

10.2 Remote-API endpoint URL structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

A.1 Logical software structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

A.2 Start screen (marked important information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
A.3 General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
A.4 Package activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
A.5 Application selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
A.6 General Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
A.7 About information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

B.1 Connection Manager with auto discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

B.2 Connection Manager with auto discovery and connected device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
B.3 Connection Manager DAC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
B.4 Connection Manager PDD connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
B.5 Connection Manager PDD Low Cost connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

C.1 Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 List of Tables

4.1 Available PDD configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4.2 Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3 PDD-2/D front operation elements description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.4 PDD-2 and PDD-2/D rear operating elements description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.5 PDD-2 and PDD-2/UHF connector description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.6 PDD-3 and PDD-3-Display connector description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

5.1 Calibration status overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

6.1 Recording states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

6.2 Available replay speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.3 Available report types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.4 Possible values to toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

8.1 CSV header data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

8.2 CSV calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.3 CSV configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.4 CSV counter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.5 CSV scalar values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.6 CSV scalar units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.7 CSV pattern elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.8 CSV data for time resolved diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.9 CSV data HNQ diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

9.1 JSON header data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

9.2 JSON calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9.3 JSON configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9.4 JSON counter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.5 JSON scalar values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.6 JSON scalar units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
9.7 JSON pattern elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
9.8 JSON data for time resolved diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
9.9 JSON data HNQ diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

10.1 Available common Remote-API endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

10.2 Writable PD settings keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
10.3 PD devices response keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10.4 Available device specific Remote-API endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10.5 PD single device response keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
10.6 Writable PD devices keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
10.7 PD single channel response keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
10.8 Writable channel keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10.9 PD single channel scalar values response keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
10.10PD single channel vector data request parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany
 Page 102 of 102

B.1 Connection elements for a DAC device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

B.2 Connection elements for a PDD device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
B.3 Connection elements for a PDD Low Cost device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Title: User’s Manual PDD ohv diagnostic GmbH

Doc.No.: 2.005-00.003-50.19 Großenhainer Str. 101
Created: November 24, 2023 01127 Dresden - Germany